Silver halide color photographic photosensitive material and image-forming method

ABSTRACT

A silver halide color photographic photosensitive material, which containes at least one specific compound containing at least one alkenylcarbonyl group, in at least one layer on a support; and an image-forming method using the same.

FIELD OF THE INVENTION

[0001] The present invention relates to a silver halide colorphotographic photosensitive material and an image-forming method.

[0002] Particularly, the present invention relates to a silver halidecolor photographic photosensitive material that is excellent in colorreproduction, image-stability, and processing properties.

[0003] Further, the present invention relates to a silver halide colorphotographic photosensitive material and an image-forming method thatare excellent in rapid processing suitability, color-forming properties,color reproduction, whiteness, and image fastness after processing.Further, the present invention relates to a silver halide colorphotographic photosensitive material and an image-forming method thatare excellent in processing stability when processed with a runningsolution.

BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION

[0004] A photosensitive material generally has silver halide emulsionlayers light-sensitive to three primary colors of blue, green, and red,and it forms a dye image according to so-called subtractive colorphotography, in which a dye image is formed by color-forming three kindscolor-forming materials (couplers) in these silver halide emulsionlayers in relation of complementary colors to the color to which each ofthe above layers is intrinsically sensitive. The dye image that isobtained by photographic processing of this photosensitive material isgenerally formed from any of azomethine dyes or indoaniline dyes formedby a reaction between an oxidation product of an aromatic primary aminecolor-developing agent and a coupler. The thus-obtained colorphotographic image is not fully stable against light and wet heat, suchthat the color (dye) image exposed to light, or stored underhigh-temperature and high-humidity conditions for a long period of time,fades or discolors, which results in deterioration of image quality.

[0005] Fading or discoloring of the image is almost a fatal disadvantagefor a recording material. As methods to eliminate such disadvantages,various techniques are proposed, such as development of couplers thatenable providing a dye excellent in fastness, use of anti-fading agents,and use of ultraviolet-absorbing agents to inhibit an image fromdeterioration owing to ultraviolet radiation. Among these techniques,the effect of inhibiting an image from deterioration that is obtained byusing anti-fading agents is remarkable. For example, it is known to useanti-fading agents, such as hydroquinones, hindered phenols, catechols,gallic acid esters, aminophenols, hindered amines, chromanols, indanes,ethers or esters that are formed by silylation, acylation, or alkylationof a phenolic hydroxyl group of each of these compounds, and metalcomplexes.

[0006] Even though these compounds are recognized as effective agents toinhibit a dye image from fading and discoloring, they are inadequate torespond to customer demand for high image quality. Further, thesecompounds fail to exhibit synthetically excellent effects that areuseful for color photography, because they sometimes cause a hue change,or generate fog, or cause dispersion failure, or produce fine crystalsafter emulsion coating. Further, to obtain high image quality, sometimesa large amount, or multiple kinds, of compounds are used. Consequently,sometimes it takes a long time to perform processing, which results indifficulty obtaining a sufficient developed dye density. Also from theviewpoint in the aforementioned aspects, development of improvedinhibitors has been desired. On the other hand, recently it has beenknown to use acrylate compounds and compounds derived from them asinhibitors of dye deterioration, as described, for example, inJP-A-8-44020 (“JP-A” means unexamined published Japanese patentapplication), JP-A-11-258748, and JP-A-11-327101. However, thesecompounds are unsatisfactory, since they are insufficient in preventingimage deterioration, or they adversely affect photographic properties.Further, even though the compounds described in JP-A-6-59390 areeffective for resistance against yellowing at the time of processing,they are insufficient to prevent image deterioration.

[0007] In silver halide photographic photosensitive materials(hereinafter also referred to simply as “photosensitive materials”) forsubtractive color photography, a color image is formed by dyes of threeprimary colors of yellow, magenta, and cyan. In a color photographicmaterial, (in particular a color print material for direct appreciation,which is used in the color photography that uses a currentp-phenylenediamine-series color-developing agent, use is made of anacylacetanilide-series compound as a yellow dye-forming coupler(hereinafter “a dye-forming coupler” is also referred to simply as “acoupler”). However, the hue of yellow dyes obtained from thesedye-forming couplers is reddish, due to an inferior sharpness of a peakof the absorption curve at the longer wavelength side (that is, on theabsorption curve, the peak in interest has subsidiary absorption at itsfoot portion at the longer wavelength side), and it is difficult toobtain a yellow hue with high purity. Further, the above-mentioned dyesare sometimes easily decomposed under conditions of high temperature andhigh humidity, or of irradiation of light, and thus they haveinsufficient image storability after development processing. Further,because the molecular extinction coefficient of the dye is low, largequantities of the coupler and silver halide are needed to obtain adesired color density, which results in an increase in the filmthickness of the photosensitive material. Such increased film thicknesssometimes reduces sharpness of the dye image, and also becomes a serioushindrance to the rapid processing that has been strongly utilized inrecent years. In this situation, improvement of these performances hasbeen desired.

[0008] In order to solve these problems, improvement of acyl groups andanilido groups were proposed on the couplers. Recently, as improvedcouplers of the conventional acylacetanilide-series couplers, there wereproposed, for example, 1-alkylcyclopropanecarbonyl acetanilide-seriescompounds, cyclomalondiamide-type couplers, pyrrole-2- or 3-yl- orindole-2- or 3-yl- carbonylacetanilide-series couplers. The dyes formedfrom these couplers were improved in terms of both hue and molecularextinction coefficient of dyes formed, compared with the conventionalones. However, these improved couplers are not satisfactory in imagestorability still. Further, owing to their complicated chemicalstructure, the synthesis route became longer, and consequently cost ofthe couplers became higher, causing a practical problem.

[0009] On the other hand, in recent years, acetic acid ester-series andacetanilide-series couplers, to which 1,2,4-benzothiadiazine-1,1-dioxideis bonded, are proposed, for example, in U.S. Pat. No. 3,841,880,JP-A-52-82423, and JP-A-2-28645. These couplers, however, are low incolor-forming property, and they are inferior in sharpness of a peak ofthe adsorption curve owing to the subsidiary absorption at the footportion on the longer wavelength side. Further, acetic ester-series andacetanilide-series couplers, to which 1,2,4-benzothiadiazine-1,1-dioxideis bonded, as described in European Patent Publication No. 1246006, areremarkably improved in these points, and thereby these couplers givedyes having high color-forming property and provide excellent absorptioncharacteristics. Nonetheless, dyes obtained from these couplers areinsufficient in fastness to light at low-density areas, under conditionsof storage at high temperature. Therefore, there is a need to improvelight fastness at a low-density area, particularly when a picture isexposed to light under high-temperature storage conditions (for example,the situation seen regarding displays in a commercial photo studio).Because a low density of yellow is employed for image reproduction of ahuman face, light fastness in such a density region is important. Thebisphenol-series image-stabilizing agents described in EP-A-1246006 andthe like still do not perform adequately under such severe storageconditions. On the contrary, reduction in color density anddeterioration of processing stability with a running solution are seenwith addition of the bisphenol compound. Therefore, further improvementhas been desired.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION

[0010] The present invention resides in a silver halide colorphotographic photosensitive material, which comprises, in at least onelayer on a support, at least one compound which has a microhardnessvalue of 200 or less when forming a polymerized film and contains atleast three alkenylcarbonyl groups in the molecule.

[0011] Further, the present invention resides in a silver halide colorphotographic photosensitive material, which comprises, in at least onelayer on a support, at least one compound represented by formula (A):

[0012] wherein, in formula (A), R₁, R₂ and R₃ each independentlyrepresent a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group, or an aryl group; R₄represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent; X₁ represents a divalentorganic group; n represents 0 or 1; a represents an integer of 1 to 6; brepresents an integer of 0 to 5; a+b is 6; when a is 2 or more, aplurality of —(X₁)_(n)—COC(R₁)═C(R₂)R₃ may be the same or different; andwhen b is 2 or more, R₄'s may be the same or different.

[0013] Further, the present invention resides in a silver halide colorphotographic photosensitive material, which comprises, in at least onelayer on a support, at least one compound represented by theabove-described formula (A) and having a microhardness value of 200 orless when forming a polymerized film.

[0014] Further, the present invention resides in a silver halide colorphotographic photosensitive material, which comprises, on a support, atleast one yellow color-forming photosensitive silver halide emulsionlayer, at least one magenta color-forming photosensitive silver halideemulsion layer, and at least one cyan color-forming photosensitivesilver halide emulsion layer,

[0015] wherein at least one yellow dye-forming coupler represented byformula (I), and at least one compound represented by formula (B) andhaving a molecular weight of 200 or more are contained in the samelayer:

[0016] wherein, in formula (I), Q represents a group of non-metal atomsthat forms a 5- to 7-membered ring in combination with the —N═C—N(R1)—;R1 represents a substituent; R2 represents a substituent; m representsan integer of 0 or more and 5 or less; when m is 2 or more, R2s may bethe same or different, or R2s may bond together to form a ring; and Xrepresents a hydrogen atom, or a group capable of being split-off upon acoupling reaction with an oxidized product of a developing agent;

[0017] wherein, in formula (B), R₁₁, R₁₂ and R₁₃ each independentlyrepresent a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group or an aryl group; R_(b)represents a n1-valent aliphatic, aryl or heterocyclic group; X₂represents a divalent organic group; n1 represents an integer of 1 ormore; n2 represents an integer of 0 or more; when n2 is 2 or more, X₂'smay be the same or different.

[0018] Further, the present invention resides in a method of forming animage, which comprises the step of subjecting any one of theabove-described silver halide color photographic photosensitivematerials to exposure to light and development processing under specificconditions.

[0019] Other and further features and advantages of the invention willappear more fully from the following description.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION

[0020] According to the present invention, there are provided thefollowing means:

[0021] (1) A silver halide color photographic photosensitive material,comprising, in at least one layer on a support, at least one compoundwhich has a microhardness value of 200 or less when forming apolymerized film and contains at least three alkenylcarbonyl groups inthe molecule.

[0022] (2) A silver halide color photographic photosensitive material,comprising, in at least one layer on a support, at least one compoundrepresented by formula (A):

[0023] wherein, in formula (A), R₁, R₂ and R₃ each independentlyrepresent a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group, or an aryl group; R₄represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent; X₁ represents a divalentorganic group; n represents 0 or 1; a represents an integer of 1 to 6; brepresents an integer of 0 to 5; a+b is 6; when a is 2 or more, aplurality of —(X₁)_(n)—COC(R₁)═C(R₂)R₃ may be the same or different; andwhen b is 2 or more, R₄'s may be the same or different.

[0024] (3) A silver halide color photographic photosensitive material,comprising, in at least one layer on a support, at least one compoundrepresented by the above-described formula (A) and having amicrohardness value of 200 or less when forming a polymerized film.

[0025] (4) The silver halide color photographic photosensitive materialaccording to the above item (1), which has, on the support, at least oneyellow color-forming photosensitive silver halide emulsion layer, atleast one magenta color-forming photosensitive silver halide emulsionlayer, and at least one cyan color-forming photosensitive silver halideemulsion layer,

[0026] wherein at least one yellow dye-forming coupler represented byformula (I) and the compound which has a microhardness value of 200 orless when forming a polymerized film and contains at least threealkenylcarbonyl groups in the molecule are contained in the same layer:

[0027] wherein, in formula (I), Q represents a group of non-metal atomsthat forms a 5- to 7-membered ring in combination with the —N═C—N(R1)—;R1 represents a substituent; R2 represents a substituent; m representsan integer of 0 or more and 5 or less; when m is 2 or more, R2s may bethe same or different, or R2s may bond together to form a ring; and Xrepresents a hydrogen atom, or a group capable of being split-off upon acoupling reaction with an oxidized product of a developing agent.

[0028] (5) The silver halide color photographic photosensitive materialaccording to the above item (2), which has, on the support, at least oneyellow color-forming photosensitive silver halide emulsion layer, atleast one magenta color-forming photosensitive silver halide emulsionlayer, and at least one cyan color-forming photosensitive silver halideemulsion layer,

[0029] wherein at least one yellow dye-forming coupler represented bythe above-described formula (I) and the compound represented by formula(A) are contained in the same layer.

[0030] (6) The silver halide color photographic photosensitive materialaccording to the above item (3), which has, on the support, at least oneyellow color-forming photosensitive silver halide emulsion layer, atleast one magenta color-forming photosensitive silver halide emulsionlayer, and at least one cyan color-forming photosensitive silver halideemulsion layer,

[0031] wherein at least one yellow dye-forming coupler represented bythe above-described formula (I), and the compound represented by formula(A) and having a microhardness value of 200 or less when forming apolymerized film are contained in the same layer.

[0032] (7) The silver halide color photographic photosensitive materialaccording to any one of the above items (4) to (6), further containingat least one compound represented by formula (Ph):

[0033] wherein, in formula (Ph), R_(b1) represents an aliphatic group,an aryl group, a carbamoyl group, an acylamino group, a carbonyl group,or a sulfonyl group; and R_(b2), R_(b3), R_(b4) and R_(b5) eachindependently represent a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a hydroxylgroup, an aliphatic group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, analkyloxy group, an aryloxy group, a heterocyclic oxy group, anoxycarbonyl group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, an oxycarbonyloxygroup, a carbamoyl group, an acylamino group, a sulfonyl group, asulfinyl group, a sulfamoyl group, an alkylthio group, or an arylthiogroup.

[0034] (8) The silver halide color photographic photosensitive materialaccording to the above item (7),

[0035] wherein the compound represented by formula (Ph) is a compoundrepresented by any one of formulae (Ph-1), (Ph-2) and (Ph-3):

[0036] wherein, in formulae (Ph-1), (Ph-2) and (Ph-3), R_(b6) representsan aliphatic group, an aryl group, an amino group, or an acyl group;R_(b1) has the same meaning as defined in formula (Ph); R_(b7), R_(b8),R_(b9), R_(b11), R_(b12), R_(b13), R_(b14), R_(b15), R_(b16), R_(b19),and R_(b20) each independetly have the same meanings as R_(b2), R_(b3),R_(b4), and R_(b5) in formula (Ph); R_(b10) represents a hydrogen atom,an aliphatic group, an acyl group, an oxycarbonyl group, a silyl group,or a phosphoryl group; X_(b) represents an alkylene group, a phenylenegroup, —O—, or —S—; and R_(b17) and R_(b18) each independently representan aliphatic group or an aryl group.

[0037] (9) The silver halide color photographic photosensitive materialaccording to any one of the above items (4) to (8), further containingat least one compound selected from the group consisting of compoundsrepresented by any one of formulae (E-1), (E-2) and (E-3):

[0038] wherein, in formulae (E-1), (E-2) and (E-3), R₄₁ represents analiphatic group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an acyl group, analiphatic oxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, an aliphaticsulfonyl group, an arylsulfonyl group, a phosphoryl group, or—Si(R₄₇)(R₄₈)(R₄₉), in which R₄₇, R₄₈ and R₄₉ each independentlyrepresent an aliphatic group, an aryl group, an aliphatic oxy group, oran aryloxy group; R₄₂, R₄₃, R₄₅ and R₄₆ each independently represent ahydrogen atom or a substituent; and Ra₁, Ra₂, Ra₃ and Ra₄ eachindependently represent a hydrogen atom or an aliphatic group.

[0039] (10) The silver halide color photographic photosensitive materialaccording to any one of the above items (4) to (9), further containingat least one compound selected from the group consisting of a metalcomplex, a ultraviolet absorbing agent, a water-insoluble homopolymer orcopolymer, and a compound represented by any one of formulae (TS-I),(TS-II), (TS-III), (TS-IV), (TS-V), (TS-VI) and (TS-VII):

[0040] wherein, in formula (TS-I), R₅₁ represents a hydrogen atom, analiphatic group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an acyl group, analiphatic oxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, an aliphaticsulfonyl group, an aryl sulfonyl group, a phosphoryl group, or—Si(R₅₈)(R₅₉)(R₆₀), in which R₅₈, R₅₉ and R₆₀ each independentlyrepresent an aliphatic group, an aryl group, an aliphatic oxy group oran aryloxy group; X₅₁ represents —O— or —N(R₅₇)—, in which R₅₇ has thesame meaning as R₅₁; X₅₅ represents —N═ or —C(R₅₂)═; X₅₆ represents —N═or —C(R₅₄)═; X₅₇ represents —N═ or —C(R₅₆)═; R₅₂, R₅₃, R₅₄, R₅₅ and R₅₆each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent; eachcombination of R₅₁ and R₅₂, R₅₇ and R₅₆, and R₅₁ and R₅₇ may bondtogether to form a 5- to 7-membered ring; each combination of R₅₂ andR₅₃, and R₅₃ and R₅₄ may bond together to form a 5- to 7-membered ring,a spiro ring, or a bicyclo ring; each of R₅₁, R₅₂, R₅₃, R₅₄, R₅₅, R₅₆and R₅₇ cannot simultaneously represent a hydrogen atom; the total ofcarbon atoms of the compound represented by formula (TS-I) is 10 ormore; and the compound represented by formula (TS-I) is neitheridentical to the compound represented by formula (Ph) nor the compoundrepresented by any one of formulae (E-1), (E-2) and (E-3);

[0041] wherein, in formula (TS-II), R₆₁, R₆₂, R₆₃ and R₆₄ eachindependently represent a hydrogen atom or an aliphatic group; eachcombination of R₆₁ and R₆₂, and R₆₃ and R₆₄ may bond together to form a5- to 7-membered ring; X₆₁ represents a hydrogen atom, an aliphaticgroup, an aliphatic oxy group, an aliphatic oxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, an aliphaticoxycarbonyloxy group, an aryl oxycarbonyloxy group, an aliphaticsulfonyl group, an aryl sulfonyl group, an aliphatic sulfinyl group, anaryl sulfinyl group, a sulfamoyl group, a carbamoyl group, a hydroxygroup, or an oxy radical group; X₆₂ represents a group of non-metalatoms necessary to form a 5- to 7-membered ring together with the—C(—R₆₁)(—R₆₂)—N(—X₆₁)—C(—R₆₃)(—R₆₄)—; and the total of carbon atoms ofthe compound represented by formula (TS-II) is 8 or more;

[0042] wherein, in formula (TS-III), R₆₅ and R₆₆ each independentlyrepresent a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group, an aryl group, an acylgroup, an aliphatic oxycarbonyl group, an aryl oxycarbonyl group, acarbamoyl group, an aliphatic sulfonyl group, or an aryl sulfonyl group;R₆₇ represents a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group, an aliphatic oxygroup, an aryloxy group, an aliphatic thio group, an arylthio group, anacyloxy group, an aliphatic oxycarbonyloxy group, an aryl oxycarbonyloxygroup, a substituted amino group, a heterocyclic group, or a hydroxylgroup; each combination of R₆₅ and R₆₆, R₆₆ and R₆₇, and R₆₅ and R₆₇ maybond together to form a 5- to 7-membered ring except2,2,6,6-tetraalkylpiperidine skeleton; each of R₆₅ and R₆₆ cannotsimultaneously represent a hydrogen atom; and the total of carbon atomsof R₆₅ and R₆₆ is 7 or more;

[0043] wherein, in formula (TS-IV), R₇₁ represents a hydrogen atom, analiphatic group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, Li, Na, or K; R₇₂represents an aliphatic group, an aryl group, or a heterocyclic group;R₇₁ and R₇₂ may bond together to form a 5- to 7-membered ring; qrepresents 0, 1 or 2; and the total of carbon atoms of R₇₁ and R₇₂ is 10or more;

[0044] wherein, in formula (TS-V), R₈₁, R₈₂ and R₈₃ each independentlyrepresent an aliphatic group, an aryl group, an aliphatic oxy group, anaryloxy group, an aliphatic amino group, or an aryl amino group; trepresents 0 or 1; each combination of R₈₁ and R₈₂, and R₈₁ and R₈₃ maybond together to form a 5- to 8-membered ring; and the total of carbonatoms of R₈₁, R₈₂ and R₈₃ is 10 or more;

[0045] wherein, in formula (TS-VI), R₈₅, R₈₆, R₈₇ and R₈₈ eachindependently represent a hydrogen atom, or a substituent except acarbonyl group, and any two of R₈₅, R₈₆, R₈₇ and R₈₈ may bond togetherto form a 5- to 7-membered ring except an aromatic ring only consistingof carbon atoms as a skeleton atom; the total of carbon atoms of thecompound represented by formula (TS-VI) is 10 or more; and each of R₈₅,R₈₆, R₈₇ and R₈₈ cannot simultaneously represent a hydrogen atom; and

[0046] wherein, in formula (TS-VII), R₉₁ represents a hydrophobic grouphaving total carbon atoms of 10 or more; and Y₉₁ represents a monovalentorganic group containing an alcoholic hydroxyl group.

[0047] (11) The silver halide color photographic photosensitive materialaccording to any one of the above items (4) to (10), wherein the yellowdye-forming coupler represented by formula (I) is a yellow dye-formingcoupler represented by formula (II):

[0048] wherein, in formula (II), R1 represents a substituent; R2represents a substituent; m represents an integer of 0 to 5; when m is 2or more, R2s may be the same or different, or R2s may bond each other toform a ring; R3 represents a substituent; na represents an integer of 0to 4; when na is 2 or more, R3s may be the same or different, or R3s maybond each other to form a ring; and X represents a hydrogen atom, or agroup capable of being split-off upon a coupling reaction with anoxidized product of a developing agent.

[0049] (12) The silver halide color photographic photosensitive materialaccording to the above item (11),

[0050] wherein, in the dye-forming coupler represented by formula (II),R1 is a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group.

[0051] (13) The silver halide color photographic photosensitive materialaccording to the above item (11),

[0052] wherein the dye-forming coupler represented by formula (II) is adye-forming coupler represented by formula (III):

[0053] wherein, in formula (III), R1, R2 and R3 each independentlyrepresent a substituent; ma represents an integer of 0 to 4; when ma is2 or more, R2s may be the same or different, or R2s may bond each otherto form a ring; na represents an integer of 0 to 4; when na is 2 ormore, R3s may be the same or different, or R3s may bond each other toform a ring; R4 represents an alkylthio group; and X represents ahydrogen atom, or a group capable of being split-off upon a couplingreaction with an oxidized product of a developing agent.

[0054] (14) The silver halide color photographic photosensitive materialaccording to the above item (13),

[0055] wherein, in the dye-forming coupler represented by formula (III),R1 is an alkoxypropyl group.

[0056] (15) The silver halide color photographic photosensitive materialaccording to the above item (13) or (14),

[0057] wherein, in the dye-forming coupler represented by formula (III),at least one R2 is a t-butyl group located in the para-position to the—S—R4 group.

[0058] (16) The silver halide color photographic photosensitive materialaccording to any one of the above items (13) to (15),

[0059] wherein, in the dye-forming coupler represented by formula (III),X is a 5,5-dimethyloxazolidine-2,4-dione-3-yl group.

[0060] (17) The silver halide color photographic photosensitive materialaccording to any one of the above items (4) to (16),

[0061] wherein a total amount of coated silver in entire photographicconstitutional layers is 0.45 g/m² or less.

[0062] (18) A method of forming an image, comprising the step ofsubjecting the silver halide color photographic photosensitive materialaccording to any one of the above items (4) to (17) to acolor-development processing with a color-developing time ranging from10 seconds to 20 seconds.

[0063] (19) A method of forming an image, which comprises exposing thesilver halide color photographic photosensitive material according toany one of the above items (4) to (17) to light by a scanning exposuresystem, wherein an exposure time per picture element is 1×10⁻⁸ to 1×10⁻⁴seconds, and there is an overlapping between rasters adjacent to eachother.

[0064] (Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention meansto include the silver halide color photographic photosensitive materialsdescribed in the items (1) to (17) above, and the image-forming methodsdescribed in the items (18) to (19) above.)

[0065] (20) A silver halide color photographic photosensitive material,comprising, on a support, at least one yellow color-formingphotosensitive silver halide emulsion layer, at least one magentacolor-forming photosensitive silver halide emulsion layer, and at leastone cyan color-forming photosensitive silver halide emulsion layer,

[0066] wherein at least one yellow dye-forming coupler represented bythe above-described formula (I), and at least one compound representedby formula (B) and having a molecular weight of 200 or more arecontained in the same layer:

[0067] wherein, in formula (B), R₁₁, R₁₂ and R₁₃ each independentlyrepresent a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group or an aryl group; R_(b)represents a n1-valent aliphatic, aryl or heterocyclic group; X₂represents a divalent organic group; n1 represents an integer of 1 ormore; n2 represents an integer of 0 or more; when n2 is 2 or more, X₂'smay be the same or different.

[0068] (21) The silver halide color photographic photosensitive materialaccording to the above item (20),

[0069] wherein the yellow dye-forming coupler represented by formula (I)is a yellow dye-forming coupler represented by formula (YC-I):

[0070] wherein, in formula (YC-I), Qa represents a group of non-metalatoms necessary to form a 5- to 7-membered ring in combination with the—N═C—N((CH₂)₃O—R21)—; R21 represents an alkyl group having carbon atomsof 4 or more and 8 or less; R22 represents a substituent; R24 representsa primary alkyl group; mb represents an integer of 0 or more and 4 orless; when mb is 2 or more, R22s may be the same or different, or R22smay bond together to form a ring; and Xa represents a hydrogen atom, ora group capable of being split-off upon a coupling reaction with anoxidized product of a developing agent.

[0071] (22) The silver halide color photographic photosensitive materialaccording to the above item (20) or (21),

[0072] wherein, in formula (B), n1 is 1.

[0073] (23) The silver halide color photographic photosensitive materialaccording to the above item (20) or (21),

[0074] wherein, in formula (B), n1 is 2.

[0075] (24) The silver halide color photographic photosensitive materialaccording to the above item (20) or (21),

[0076] wherein, in formula (B), n1 is 3; and R_(b) is a heterocyclicgroup.

[0077] (25) The silver halide color photographic photosensitive materialaccording to the above item (20) or (21),

[0078] wherein, in formula (B), n1 is 3; and X₂ is represented byformula (C):

[0079] Formula (C)

*—RcO—

[0080] The sign * indicates a bonding site with Rb.

[0081] wherein, in formula (C), R_(c) represents an alkylene group; andwhen n2 is 2 or more, —RcO—'s may be the same or different.

[0082] (26) The silver halide color photographic photosensitive materialaccording to the above item (20) or (21),

[0083] wherein, in formula (B), n1 is 4.

[0084] (27) The silver halide color photographic photosensitive materialaccording to any one of the above items (20) to (26),

[0085] wherein, in formula (B), R₁₁, R₁₂ and R₁₃ each are a hydrogenatom.

[0086] (28) The silver halide color photographic photosensitive materialaccording to any one of the above items (20) to (27), further containingat least one compound represented by the above-described formula (Ph) inthe layer containing said at least one yellow dye-forming couplerrepresented by formula (I).

[0087] (29) The silver halide color photographic photosensitive materialaccording to the above item (28),

[0088] wherein the compound represented by formula (Ph) is a compoundrepresented by any one of the above-described formulae (Ph-1), (Ph-2)and (Ph-3).

[0089] (30) The silver halide color photographic photosensitive materialaccording to any one of the above items (20) to (29), further containingat least one compound selected from the group consisting of compoundsrepresented by any one of the above-described formulae (E-1), (E-2) and(E-3) in the layer containing said at least one yellow dye-formingcoupler represented by formula (I).

[0090] (31) The silver halide color photographic photosensitive materialaccording to any one of the above items (20) to (30), further containingat least one compound selected from the group consisting of a metalcomplex, a ultraviolet absorbing agent, a water-insoluble homopolymer orcopolymer, and a compound represented by any one of the above-describedformulae (TS-I), (TS-II), (TS-III), (TS-IV), (TS-V), (TS-VI) and(TS-VII).

[0091] (32) The silver halide color photographic photosensitive materialaccording to any one of the above items (20) to (31),

[0092] wherein a total amount of coated silver in entire photographicconstitutional layers is 0.45 g/m² or less.

[0093] (33) A method of forming an image, comprising the step ofsubjecting the silver halide color photographic photosensitive materialaccording to any one of the above items (20) to (32) to a processingwith a color-developing time ranging from 10 seconds to 20 seconds.

[0094] (34) A method of forming an image, comprising the step ofexposing the silver halide color photographic photosensitive materialaccording to any one of the above items (20) to (32) to light by ascanning exposure system, wherein an exposure time per picture elementis 1×10⁻⁸ to 1×10⁻⁴ seconds, and there is an overlapping between rastersadjacent to each other.

[0095] (35) The method of forming an image according to the above item(34), further comprising subjecting the silver halide color photographicphotosensitive material according to any one of the above items (20) to(32) to a processing with a color-developing time ranging from 10seconds to 20 seconds.

[0096] (Hereinafter, a second embodiment of the present invention meansto include the silver halide color photographic photosensitive materialsdescribed in the items (20) to (32) above, and the image-forming methodsdescribed in the items (33) to (35) above.)

[0097] Herein, the present invention means to include both of the abovefirst and second embodiments, unless otherwise specified.

[0098] The present invention is explained below in detail.

[0099] The term “aliphatic (group)” used in the present specificationmeans such moieties or groups, in which the aliphatic moiety may be asaturated or unsaturated, and straight chain, branched chain, or cyclic,and the aliphatic moiety embraces, for example, an alkyl group, analkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a cycloalkyl group, a cycloalkenylgroup, and a cycloalkynyl group; and these can be unsubstituted orsubstituted. Further, the term “aryl (group)” used herein means asubstituted or unsubstituted, monocyclic or condensed ring. The term“heterocyclic (group)” used herein means such moieties or groups, inwhich the heterocycle contains at least one hetero atom (such asnitrogen, sulfur and oxygen atoms) in the ring skeleton, and theheterocycle embraces a substituted or unsubstituted, saturated orunsaturated, and monocyclic or condensed ring.

[0100] The term “substituent” used in the present specification meansany groups or atoms that are able to substitute for other groups oratoms; and embraces, for example, an aliphatic group, an aryl group, aheterocyclic group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, an acylamino group,an aliphatic oxy group, an aryloxy group, a heterocyclic oxy group, analiphatic oxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a heterocyclicoxycarbonyl group, a carbamoyl group, an aliphatic sulfonyl group, anarylsulfonyl group, a heterocyclic sulfonyl group, an aliphaticsulfonyloxy group, an arylsulfonyloxy group, a heterocyclic sulfonyloxygroup, a sulfamoyl group, an aliphatic sulfonamido group, an arylsulfonamido group, a heterocyclic sulfonamido group, an amino group, analiphatic amino group, an arylamino group, a heterocyclic amino group,an aliphatic oxycarbonylamino group, an aryloxycarbonylamino group, aheterocyclic oxycarbonylamino group, an aliphatic sulfinyl group, anaryl sulfinyl group, an aliphatic thio group, an arylthio group, ahydroxy group, a cyano group, a sulfo group, a carboxyl group, analiphatic oxyamino group, an aryloxyamino group, a carbamoylamino group,a sulfamoylamino group, a halogen atom, a sulfamoylcarbamoyl group, acarbamoylsulfamoyl group, a dialiphatic oxyphosphinyl group, and adiaryloxyphosphinyl group.

[0101] Hereinafter, the compound for use in the present invention isexplained below.

[0102] The alkenylcarbonyl-series compound for use in the firstembodiment of the present invention is explained below.

[0103] The alkenylcarbonyl-series compound for use in the firstembodiment of the present invention is a compound having a microhardnessvalue of 200 or less when forming a polymerized film and containing atleast three alkenylcarbonyl groups in the molecule; or analkenylcarbonyl-series compound represented by formula (A).

[0104] The alkenylcarbonyl-series compound used in the first embodimentof the present invention is preferably an alkenylcarbonyl-seriescompound represented by formula (A); more preferablly analkenylcarbonyl-series compound having a microhardness value of 200 orless at the time of forming a polymerized film and represented byformula (A).

[0105] The microhardness value is preferably in the range of from 20 to200, more preferably in the range of from 50 to 200.

[0106] The compound containing at least three alkenylcarbonyl groups inthe molecule for use in the first embodiment of the present invention isexplained below.

[0107] There is no particular restriction in the chemical structure ofthe compound containing at least three alkenylcarbonyl groups in themolecule, as long as the compound has at least three alkenylcarbonylgroups. However, it is necesarry that the microhardness value of thecompound be 200 or less. The number of alkenylcarbonyl groups ispreferably in the range of from 3 to 12, more preferably in the range offrom 3 to 6. Plural (at least three) alkenylcarbonyl groups may be thesame or different from each other. The basic skeleton of thealkenylcarbonyl group is preferably —CO—C(R₁)═C(R₂)R₃, in which R₁, R₂,and R₃ each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group,or an aryl group.

[0108] The “microhardness value when forming a polymerized film” as usedin the present invention is defined as the value of universal hardness(HU value) according to an ultramicro-Vickers hardness test of the filmobtained by a film production of polymerizing a monomer. Specifically,the microhardness value can be measured by the following method.

[0109] First, a coating solution of a monomer having the compositiondescribed below is prepared, and then it is coated on a 188-μm-thick PETsupport, so that a polymer film becomes 40 μm in thickness afterpolymerization. (Composition of the coating solution)Alkenylcarbonyl-series monomer 20 g Ethyl methyl ketone 11 ml IRGACURE184 (trade name, manufactured 0.74 g by Ciba Specialty Chemicals

[0110] A mixture of the above-mentioned composition is stirred at roomtemperature for 3 hours, to make a coating solution.

[0111] Then, after drying at 120° C. for 2 minutes, the coating film issubjected to photoirradiation using a metal halide lamp, with aillumination intensity of 750 mJ/cm², to thereby polymerize thealkenylcarbonyl-series compound.

[0112] Last, the aforementioned sample is subjected to thermal treatmentat 120° C. for 5 minutes, to complete a polymer film on the support.

[0113] The thus-completed sample is adhered to a glass dry plate, andthe sample on the plate is subjected to ultramicro-Vickers testing usinga universal hardness tester (trade name: Fisher Scope Model H100V,manufactured by F. Fisher Co., Ltd.) under the measuring conditionsdescribed below, to measure the microhardness value.

[0114] (Measuring Conditions)

[0115] Shape of indenting tool: Square pyramid of 136° in terms of apoint angle between the opposite faces

[0116] Indenting load: 100 mN

[0117] Indentation depth: 4 μm

[0118] Specific examples of the compound having a microhardness value of200 or less and containing at least three alkenylcarbonyl groups in themolecule are shown below. However, the present invention is not limitedto these compounds.

[0119] KAYARAD DPCA 20 [trade name, manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co.,Ltd.]

[0120] [The material is mainly composed of the hereinafter describedexemplified compound (A-12)]

[0121] a microhardness value: 192

[0122] KAYARAD DPCA 30 [trade name, manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co.,Ltd.]

[0123] [The material is mainly composed of the hereinafter describedexemplified compound (A-11)]

[0124] a microhardness value: 154

[0125] KAYARAD DPCA 60 [trade name, manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co.,Ltd.]

[0126] [The material is mainly composed of the hereinafter describedexemplified compound (A-8)]

[0127] a microhardness value: 92

[0128] Next, the compound represented by formula (A) for use in thefirst embodiment of the present invention is explained in detail below.

[0129] In the formula (A), R₁, R₂ and R₃ each independently represent ahydrogen atom, an aliphatic group (preferably a substituted orunsubstituted aliphatic group having 1 to 24 carbon atoms, morepreferably an alkyl group; e.g., methyl, ethyl, isopropyl, dodecyl,hexadecyl, methoxyethyl), or an aryl group (preferably a substituted orunsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, e.g., phenyl,4-methylphenyl); R₄ represents a hydrogen atom, or a substituent (anysubstitutive groups, for example, an aliphatic group, an acyl group, analiphatic oxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a heterocyclicoxycarbonyl group, a carbamoyl group, an aliphatic sulfonyl group, anarylsulfonyl group, a heterocyclic sulfonyl group, a sulfamoyl group);and X₁ represents a divalent organic group. The term “divalent organicgroup” means an organic group having two bonding hands of a single bond(at two sites); for example, organic groups having two bonding hands(i.e. divalent groups) that are formed by further release of anarbitrary hydrogen atom from a group (i.e. monovalent substituent), asexemplified in the foregoing explanation of the substituent for use inthe present invention. Examples of the divalent organic group includegroups described later, and other divalent groups, such as —O—, —S—,—SO—, —SO₂—, and —NR_(x)— (R_(x) represents a hydrogen atom, analiphatic group, or a heterocyclic group).

[0130] n represents 0 (zero) or 1. a represents an integer of 1 to 6,and b represents an integer of 0 to 5, providing that a plus b is 6.When a is 2 or more, plural —(X₁)_(n)—COC(R₁)═C(R₂)R₃ may be the same ordifferent. When b is 2 or more, plural R₄'s may be the same ordifferent. However, it is necessary that —(X₁)_(n)—COC(R₁)═C(R₂)R₃ or R₄bonds to the “—” portion at the end of each O atom from 6 groups ofCH₂O— in the basic structure shown by [ ] in formula (A).

[0131] In the present invention, R₁, R₂ and R₃ are each preferably ahydrogen atom, a methyl group, or an ethyl group; most preferably ahydrogen atom. In the present invention, R₄ is preferably an aliphaticgroup, an acyl group, an aliphatic oxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonylgroup, or a carbamoyl group; more preferably an acyl group. In thepresent invention, X₁ is preferably a divalent group described below,more preferably any one of ((1)) to ((10)) and ((14)) to ((17))described below, and most preferably any one of ((1)) to ((4)) and ((6))to ((8)) described below.

[0132] the sign * indicates a bonding site with an oxygen atom ofdipentaerythritol

[0133] In the present invention, it is preferable that R₁ is a hydrogenatom or a methyl group, R₂ and R₃ are each a hydrogen atom, and R₄ is anacryloyl group; and more preferably that R₁, R₂ and R₃ are each ahydrogen atom, and R₄ is an acryloyl group.

[0134] Further, it is more preferable that n is 1, X₁ is any one of((1)) to ((4)), ((6)) or ((7)) described above, and R₁, R₂ and R₃ areeach a hydrogen atom. Furthermore preferably, a is 2 or more.

[0135] Preferable specific examples of the compound represented byformula (A) defined in the present invention are shown below. However,the present invention is not limited to these compounds.

[0136] The compound represented by formula (A) defined in the presentinvention may be used singly or in combination of two or more of thecompounds. Many of these compounds are commercially available. Forexample, KAYARAD D-310 (trade name) manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co.,Ltd., which is a commercially availble product, contains theabove-exemplified compound (A-2) as a main component. Likewise, thereadily available products under the trade names of KAYARAD DPCA 60,KAYARAD DPCA 30, and KAYARAD DPCA 20 are commercially available from thesame company and contain the above-exemplified compounds (A-8), (A-11)and (A-12), respectively as a main component. Besides, these compoundscan be synthesized according to the method of reacting dipentaerythritol(if necessary, it may have been previously subjected to esterification,amidation (amide modification), or alkylation, or alternatively toreaction with lactone) with a derivative of acrylic acid or the like.

[0137] The alkenylcarbonyl-series compound for use in the firstembodiment of the present invention and a dye-forming coupler may beadded to separate layers, or the same layer. However, it is preferablethat the alkenylcarbonyl-series compound and the dye-forming coupler beincorporate in the same layer. As the dye-forming coupler used in thefirst embodiment of the present invention, a dye-forming couplerdescribed below (preferably, a yellow dye-forming coupler) is preferred.An addition amount of the alkenylcarbonyl-series compound, particularlythe compound represented by formula (A), for use in the presentinvention is preferably in the range of 10 to 400% by mass, morepreferably in the range of 20 to 300% by mass, and most preferably inthe range of 20 to 200% by mass, to the dye-forming coupler.

[0138] The compound represented by formula (A) defined in the presentinvention may be used in combination with various kinds of dye-formingcouplers, thereby exhibiting advantageous effects of the presentinvention. As a result, an image high in fastness can be obtained, sothat disadvantages in conventional techniques can be improved.

[0139] Next, the compound represented by formula (B) for use in thesecond embodiment of the present invention is explained in detail below.

[0140] In formula (B), R₁₁, R₁₂ and R₁₃ each independently represent ahydrogen atom, an aliphatic group (preferably a substituted orunsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 24 carbon atoms, e.g., methyl,ethyl, isopropyl, dodecyl, hexadecyl, methoxyethyl) or an aryl group(preferably a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 30carbon atoms, e.g., phenyl, 4-methylphenyl). R_(b) represents ann1-valent aliphatic group (preferably an n1-valent substituted orunsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 24 carbon atoms, e.g., methyl,ethyl, isopropyl, dodecyl, hexadecyl, methoxyethyl, methylene,methylidene, 1,2,3-propanetri-yl), an aryl group (preferably ann1-valent substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 30 carbonatoms, e.g., phenyl, 4-methylphenyl, phenylene), or a heterocyclic group(preferably a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group containingat least one nitrogen, oxygen or sulfur atom, and having 2 to 30 carbonatoms; e.g., those formed of a hetero ring such as pyridine, triazine,morpholine, and thiophene). X₂ represents a divalent organic group (thedetail thereof is described above). When n2 is 2 or more, plural X₂'smay be the same or different from each other.

[0141] Herein, the compound represented by formula (B) has a molecularweight of 200 or more.

[0142] In the present invention, R₁₁, R₁₂ and R₁₃ are each preferably ahydrogen atom, or an aliphatic group; more preferably a hydrogen atom,or an alkyl group; and most preferably a hydrogen atom. In the presentinvention, R_(b) is preferably an n1-valent aliphatic group orheterocyclic group, more preferably an n1-valent alkyl group. In thepresent invention, n1 is preferably an integer of 1 to 6, morepreferably an integer of 2 to 4. X₂ is preferably a divalent groupdescribed below; more preferably any one of ((1)) to ((10)), ((14)) to((17)), ((20)), and ((23)); and most preferably any one of ((1)) to((4)), ((6)) to ((8)), ((20)), and ((23)). The molecular weight of thecompound represented by formula (B) is 200 or more (preferably from 200to 3,000). In the present invention, the molecular weight is morepreferably 350 or more; further preferably from 350 to 2,000; andfurthermore preferably from 350 to 1,000.

[0143] The sign * indicates a bonding site with Rb.

[0144] In the present invention, it is preferable that n1 is 1, 2 or 3.When n1 is 3, R_(b) is preferably a heterocyclic group.

[0145] Further, X₂ is preferably a group represented by formula (C)described below, particularly preferably when n1 is 3.

[0146] Formula (C)

*—RcO—

[0147] The sign * indicates a bonding site with Rb.

[0148] In formula (C), R_(c) represents an alkylene group [preferably asubstituted or unsubstituted alkylene group having 1 to 24 (preferably 1to 12, more preferably 1 to 6) carbon atoms, e.g., methylene, ethylene,propylene, 2-methyl-1,3-propylene, 1,6-hexylene]. When n2 is 2 or more,plural —RcO—'s may be the same or different from each other.

[0149] In the present invention, it is preferable that R₁₁ is a hydrogenatom or a methyl group; R₁₂ and R₁₃ are each a hydrogen atom; n1 is 2, 3or 4; n2 is 1 or 2; X₂ is any one of ((1)) to ((4)), ((6)) to ((8)),((20)), and ((23)); and R_(b) is an n1-valent alkyl group. It is morepreferable that R₁₁, R₁₂ and R₁₃ are each a hydrogen atom; n1 is 3 or 4;X₂ is any one of ((1)) to ((4)), ((6)) to ((8)), ((20)), and ((23)); andR_(b) is an n1-valent alkyl group.

[0150] Preferable specific examples of the compound represented byformula (B) defined in the present invention are shown below. However,the present invention is not limited to these compounds.

[0151] The compound represented by formula (B) defined in the presentinvention may be used singly or in combination of two or more of thecompounds. Many of these compounds are commercially avaliable. Forexample, the product that is commercially available under the trade nameof NK Ester AMP-60G from Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd. contains theaforementioned exemplified compound (B-1). Likewise, the product that iscommercially available under the trade name of KAYARAD HDDA from NipponKayaku Co., Ltd. contains the aforementioned exemplified compound(B-24), and the product that is commercially available under the tradename of ARONIX M315 from Toagosei Co., Ltd. contains the aforementionedexemplified compound (B-38), each of these products are readilyavailable. Besides, these compounds can be synthesized according to themethod of reacting a starting substance, for example, pentaerythritol(if necessary, it may have been previously subjected to esterification,amidation (amide modification), or alkylation, or alternatively toreaction with lactone), with a derivative of acrylic acid or the like.Other compounds can be also easily synthesized by an ordinary reactionsuch as esterification and amidation.

[0152] The compound represented by formula (B) defined in the presentinvention and a dye-forming coupler may be contained in separate layers,or the same layer. However, in order to exhibit advantageous effects ofthe present invention, it is preferable that the compound represented byformula (B) and a dye-forming coupler be incorporated in the same layer.The dye-forming coupler that can be used is preferably a dye-formingcoupler described below. An addition amount of the compound representedby formula (B) is preferably in the range of 10 to 400% by mass, morepreferably in the range of 20 to 300% by mass, and most preferably inthe range of 20 to 200% by mass, to the dye-forming coupler.

[0153] Next, the dye-forming coupler represented by formula (I) that canbe used in the present invention is explained in detail.

[0154] In formula, R1 represents a substituent except for a hydrogenatom. As examples of the substituent, there are illustrated a halogenatom, an alkyl group in which a cycloalkyl group and a bicycloalkylgroup are embraced; an alkenyl group in which a cycloalkenyl group and abicycloalkenyl group are embraced; an alkynyl group, an aryl group, aheterocyclic group, a cyano group, a hydroxyl group, a nitro group, acarboxyl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a silyloxy group, aheterocyclic oxy group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyloxy group, analkoxycarbonyloxy group, an aryloxycarbonyloxy group, an amino group inwhich an alkylamino group and an anilino group are embraced; anacylamino group, an aminocarbonylamino group, an alkoxycarbonylaminogroup, an aryloxycarbonylamino group, a sulfamoylamino group, an alkyl-or aryl-sulfonylamino group, a mercapto group, an alkylthio group, anarylthio group, a heterocyclic thio group, a sulfamoyl group, a sulfogroup, an alkyl- or aryl-sulfinyl group, an alkyl- or aryl-sulfonylgroup, an acyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group,a carbamoyl group, an aryl- or heterocyclic-azo group, an imido group, aphosphino group, a phosphinyl group, a phosphinyloxy group, aphosphinylamino group, and a silyl group.

[0155] These substituents may be further substituted with anothersubstituent. Examples of this another substituent are the same asdescribed as the examples of the above-mentioned substituent.

[0156] R1 is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group. Thetotal of carbon atoms of R1 is preferably in the range of from 1 to 60,more preferably in the range of from 2 to 50, furthermore preferably inthe range of from 4 to 40, and most preferably in the range of from 7 to30. When R1 is a substituted alkyl group, can be mentioned as thesubstituent are atoms and groups set forth as examples of thesubstituent of the above-mentioned R1.

[0157] R1 is preferably an unsubstituted alkyl group having the total ofcarbon atoms of at least 11, or a substituted alkyl group substitutedwith an alkoxy group or an aryloxy group in the 2-, 3-, or 4-position,and having the total of carbon atoms of at least 4 including the numberof carbon atoms of substituents; more preferably an unsubstituted alkylgroup having the total of carbon atoms of at least 16, or a substitutedalkyl group substituted with an alkoxy group or an aryloxy group in the3-position, and having the total of carbon atoms of at least 6 includingthe number of carbon atoms of substituents; furthermore preferably aC₁₆H₃₃ group, a C₁₈H₃₇ group, a 3-lauryloxypropyl group, a 3-hexyloxypropyl group, a 3-butoxypropyl group, or a3-(2,4-di-t-amylphenoxy)propyl group; and most preferably a3-butoxypropyl group.

[0158] In formula (I), Q represents a group of non-metal atoms thatforms a 5- to 7-membered ring in combination with the —N═C—N(R1)—.Preferably, the 5- to 7-membered ring thus formed is a substituted orunsubstituted, and monocyclic or condensed heterocycle. More preferably,the ring-forming atoms are selected from carbon, nitrogen and sulfuratoms. Still more preferably, Q represents a group represented by—C(—R11)═C(—R12)—SO₂— or —C(—R11)═C(—R12)—CO— (in the present invention,these expressions of the foregoing groups do not limit the bondingorientation of the group in formula (I), to the ones shown by theseexpressions). Among these, Q is preferably —C(R11)═C(—R12)—SO₂—. R11 andR12 are groups that bond each other to form a 5- to 7-membered ringtogether with the —C═C— moiety, or R11 and R12 each independentlyrepresent a hydrogen atom or a substituent. The 5- to 7-membered ringthus formed may be saturated or unsaturated, and the ring may be analicyclic, aromatic or heterocyclic ring. Examples of the ring includebenzene, furan, thiophene, cyclopentane, and cyclohexane rings. Further,when R11 and R12 represent a substituent, or when the ring has asubstituent, examples of these substituents are those enumerated as thesubstituent of the above-described R1 (hereinafter also referred to asthe substituent of R1).

[0159] These substituents and the rings formed through bonding of pluralsubstituents may be further substituted with another substituent.Examples of this another substituent are the same as described as theexamples of the above-mentioned substituent of R1.

[0160] In formula (I), R2 represents a substituent except for a hydrogenatom. Examples of the substituent are the atoms and groups set forth asthe substituent of R1. R2 is preferably a halogen atom (for example,fluorine, chlorine, bromine), an alkyl group (for example, methyl,isopropyl, t-butyl), an aryl group (for example, phenyl, naphthyl), analkoxy group (for example, methoxy, isopropyloxy), an aryloxy group (forexample, phenoxy), an acyloxy group (for example, acetyloxy), an aminogroup (for example, dimethylamino, morpholino), an acylamino group (forexample, acetamido), a sulfonamido group (for example, methanesulfonamido, benzene sulfonamido), an alkoxycarbonyl group (for example,methoxycarbonyl), an aryloxycarbonyl group (for example,phenoxycarbonyl), a carbamoyl group (for example, N-methylcarbamoyl,N,N-diethylcarbamoyl), a sulfamoyl group (for example,N-methylsulfamoyl, N,N-diethylsulfamoyl), an alkylsulfonyl group (forexample, methane sulfonyl), an arylsulfonyl group (for example, benzenesulfonyl), an alkylthio group (for example, methylthio, octylthio,dodecylthio), an arylthio group (for example, phenylthio, naphthylthio,2-methoxyphenylthio), a cyano group, a carboxyl group, and a sulfogroup. Further, it is preferred that at least one R2 is located at anortho-site to the —CONH— group. R2 located in an ortho-position to the—CONH— group is preferably a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, an aryloxygroup, an alkyl group, an alkylthio group or an arylthio group; morepreferably an alkylthio group or an arylthio group; and furtherpreferably an alkylthio group (preferably a primary alkylthio group or atertiary alkylthio group, more preferably a primary alkylthio group,furthermore preferably a primary alkylthio group that is branched at theβ-position, and most preferably a 2-ethylhexylthio group). Furthermore,it is preferred that one R2 is also located in the para-position toanother R2 located in an ortho-position to the above-described —CONH—group. In this case, R2 located in the para-position is preferably analkyl group, more preferably a teritiary alkyl group, and furthermorepreferably a t-butyl group. It is most preferred that R2 located in the2-position to the —CONH— group is a 2-ethylhexylthio group, and anotherR2 located in the 5-position to the —CONH— group is a t-butyl group.

[0161] The total of carbon atoms of R2 is preferably in the range offrom 0 to 60, more preferably in the range of from 0 to 50, andfurthermore preferably in the range of from 0 to 40.

[0162] In formula (I), m represents an integer of 0 or more and 5 orless. When m is 2 or more, R2s may be the same or different, and the R2smay bond together to form a ring. m is preferably in the range of 1 to3, more preferably in the range of 1 to 2, and most preferably 2.

[0163] In formula (I), X represents a hydrogen atom, or a group capableof being split-off upon a coupling reaction with an oxidized product ofa developing agent. In the present invention, X is preferably a groupcapable of being split-off upon a coupling reaction with an oxidizedproduct of a developing agent.

[0164] Examples of the group capable of being split-off upon a couplingreaction with an oxidized product of a developing agent include a groupthat splits off with a nitrogen, oxygen or sulfur atom (a splitting-offatom); or a halogen atom (e.g., chlorine, bromine).

[0165] Examples of the group that splits off with a nitrogen atominclude a heterocyclic group (preferably a 5- to 7-membered substitutedor unsubstituted saturated or unsaturated aromatic (herein the term“aromatic” is used to embrace a substance that has (4n+2) cyclicconjugated electrons) or non-aromatic, monocyclic or condensedheterocyclic group; more preferably a 5- or 6-membered heterocyclicgroup, in which the ring-forming atoms are selected from carbon, oxygen,nitrogen and sulfur atoms and in addition at least one of hetero atomsselected from nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur atoms is incorporated;specific examples of the heterocyclic group include succinimido,maleinimido, phthalimido, diglycolimido, pyrrole, pyrazole, imidazole,1,2,3-triazole, 1,2,4-triazole, tetrazole, indole, benzopyrazole,benzimidazole, benzotriazole, imidazolidine-2,4-dione,oxazolidine-2,4-dione, thiazolidine-2-one, benzimidazoline-2-one,benzoxazoline-2-one, benzothiazoline-2-one, 2-pyrroline-5-one,2-imidazoline-5-one, indoline-2,3-dione, 2,6-dioxypurine, parabanicacid, 1,2,4-triazolidine-3,5-dione, 2-pyridone, 4-pyridone,2-pyrimidone, 6-pyridazone, 2-pyrazone,2-amino-1,3,4-thiazolidine-4-one), a carbonamido group (e.g., acetamido,trifluoroacetamido), a sulfonamido group (e.g., methanesulfonamido,benzenesulfonamido), an arylazo group (e.g., phenylazo, naphthylazo),and a carbamoylamino group (e.g., N-methyl carbamoylamino).

[0166] Preferred of the group that splits off with a nitrogen atom areheterocyclic groups; more preferably aromatic heterocyclic groups having1, 2, 3 or 4 ring-forming nitrogen atoms, or heterocyclic groupsrepresented by the following formula (L):

[0167] wherein, in formula (L), L represents a moiety that forms a 5- to6-membered nitrogen-containing heterocycle with the —NC(═O)—.

[0168] Examples of the moiety are enumerated in the explanation of theabove-mentioned heterocyclic group, and such moieties as enumeratedabove are more preferred. Particularly preferably, L is a moiety thatforms a 5-membered nitrogen-containing heterocyclic ring.

[0169] Preferred of the group that splits off with a nitrogen atom areimidazolidine-2,4-dione, oxazolidine-2,4-dione, imidazole and pyrazole,each of which may have a substituent; and most preferred is5,5-dimethyloxazolidine-2,4-dione-3-yl.

[0170] Examples of the group that splits off with an oxygen atom includean aryloxy group (e.g., phenoxy, 1-naphthoxy), a heterocyclic oxy group(e.g., pyridyloxy, pyrazolyloxy), an acyloxy group (e.g., acetoxy,benzoyloxy), an alkoxy group (e.g., methoxy, dodecyloxy), a carbamoyloxygroup (e.g., N,N-diethylcarbamoyloxy, morpholinocarbamoyloxy), anaryloxycarbonyloxy group (e.g., phenoxycarbonyloxy), analkoxycarbonyloxy group (e.g., methoxycarbonyloxy, ethoxycarbonyloxy),an alkylsulfonyloxy group (e.g., methanesulfonyloxy), and an arylsulfonyloxy group (e.g., benzenesulfonyloxy, toluenesulfonyloxy).

[0171] Preferred of the group that splits off with an oxygen atom are anaryloxy group, an acyloxy group and a heterocyclic oxy group.

[0172] Examples of the group that splits off with a sulfur atom includean arylthio group (e.g., phenylthio, naphthylthio), a heterocyclic thiogroup (e.g., tetrazolylthio, 1,3,4-thiadiazolylthio, 1,3,4-oxazolylthio,benzimidazolyl thio), an alkylthio group (e.g., methylthio, octylthio,hexadecylthio), an alkylsulfinyl group (e.g., methane sulfinyl), anarylsulfinyl group (e.g., benzenesulfinyl), an arylsulfonyl group (e.g.,benzenesulfonyl), and an alkylsulfonyl group (e.g., methansulfonyl).

[0173] Preferred of the group that splits off with a sulfur atom are anarylthio group and a heterocyclic thio group. A heterocyclic thio groupis more preferred.

[0174] X may be substituted with a substituent. Examples of thesubstituent substituting on X include those exemplified as thesubstituent of the above-mentioned R1.

[0175] X is preferably a group that splits off with a nitrogen atom, agroup that splits off with an oxygen atom, or a group that splits offwith a sulfur atom. More preferably X is a group that splits off with anitrogen atom, and further preferably X is one of the above-mentionedpreferable examples of the group that splits off with a nitrogen atom,and they are preferable in the described order. Particularly preferably,X is a 5,5-dimethyloxazolidine-2,4-dione-3-yl group.

[0176] X may be a photographically useful group. Examples of thephotographically useful group include a group to give any of adevelopment inhibitor, a desilvering accelerator, a redox compound, adye, a coupler, or a precursor of these compounds.

[0177] In order to render the coupler immobile in the photosensitivematerial, at least one of Q, R1, X, R2 and R4 described below haspreferably 7 to 50 carbon atoms, more preferably 8 to 40 carbon atoms intotal respectively, including carbon atoms of substituent(s) thereon.

[0178] In the present invention, it is preferable that the compoundrepresented by formula (I) is a compound represented by formula (II).

[0179] In formula (II), R1, R2, m, and X each have the same meanings asdescribed in formula (I). Preferable ranges thereof are also the same.

[0180] In formula (II), R3 represents a substituent. Examples of thesubstituent include those groups and atoms exemplified as thesubstituent of the above-mentioned R1. Preferably R3 is a halogen atom(i.e., fluorine, chlorine, bromine), an alkyl group (e.g., methyl,isopropyl), an aryl group (e.g., phenyl, naphthyl), an alkoxy group(e.g., methoxy, isopropyloxy), an aryloxy group (e.g., phenoxy), anacyloxy group (e.g., acetyloxy), an amino group (e.g., dimethylamino,morpholino), an acylamino group (e.g., acetamido), a sulfonamido group(e.g., methanesulfonamido, benzenesulfonamido), an alkoxycarbonyl group(e.g., methoxycarbonyl), an aryloxycarbonyl group (e.g.,phenoxycarbonyl), a carbamoyl group (e.g., N-methylcarbamoyl,N,N-diethylcarbamoyl), a sulfamoyl group (e.g., N-methylsulfamoyl,N,N-diethylsulfamoyl), an alkylsulfonyl group (e.g., methane sulfonyl),an arylsulfonyl group (e.g., benzene sulfonyl), a cyano group, acarboxyl group, or a sulfo group.

[0181] na represents an integer of 0 to 4. When na is 2 or more, R3s maybe the same or different, and the R3s may bond each other to form aring.

[0182] Among the dye-forming coupler represented by formula (II), adye-forming coupler represented by formula (III) is further prefereble.

[0183] In formula (III), R1, R2, R3, na, and X each have the samemeanings as those described in formula (II). Preferable ranges thereofare also the same.

[0184] In formula (III), R4 represents an alkyl group. ma represents aninteger of from 0 to 4. When ma is 2 or more, R2s may be the same ordifferent, and the R2s may bond to each other to form a ring. ma ispreferably 0, 1, or 2, more preferably 0 or 1, and most preferably 1.

[0185] The alkyl group of R4 may have a substituent. As the substituent,atoms and groups set forth as a substituent of the above-mentioned R1can be mentioned. The substituent is preferably an alkyl group or anaryl group; more preferably an alkyl group. The alkyl group of R4 ispreferably a primary alkyl group or a tertiary alkyl group; morepreferably a primary alkyl group; furthermore preferably a primary alkylgroup that is branched at the β-position; and most preferably a2-ethylhexyl group.

[0186] The total of carbon atoms of R4 including its substituent ispreferably in the range of from 1 to 30; more preferably in the range offrom 3 to 30; furthermore preferably in the range of from 3 to 20; andmost preferably in the range of from 4 to 12.

[0187] Further, in the present invention, particularly in the secondembodiment of the present invention, a yellow dye-forming couplerrepresented by formula (YC-I) is also preferably used.

[0188] In formula (YC-I), R21 represents a substituted or unsubstitutedalkyl group having 4 to 8 carbon atoms. As the substituent that R21 mayhave, those atoms and groups set forth as the substituent of theabove-mentioned R1 in formula (I), can be mentioned. R21 is preferfablyan unsubstituted alkyl group having 4 to 6 carbon atoms; and furtherpreferably a n-butyl group.

[0189] In formula (YC-I), Qa represents a group of non-metal atoms thatforms a 5- to 7-membered ring in combination with the—N═C—N((CH₂)₃O—R21)—. (Qa has substantially the same meaning as Q informula (I), though literal expression of Qa is different from that of Qin formula (I).) Preferred examples of Qa include rings and groupsexemplified as Q in formula (I).

[0190] In formula (YC-I), R22 has the same meaning as R2 described informula (I). Preferable range thereof is also the same.

[0191] In formula (YC-I), R22 is more preferably a t-alkyl group,furthermore preferably a t-butyl group, and most preferably a t-butylgroup in the para-position to the —S—R24.

[0192] In formula (YC-I), mb represents an integer of from 0 to 4. Whenmb is 2 or more, R22s may be the same or different from each other, andthe R22s may bond to each other to form a ring. In the presentinvention, mb is preferably 0 or 1.

[0193] In formula (YC-I), R24 represents a primary alkyl group that mayhave a substituent. Examples of the substituent are the atoms and groupsset forth above as the substituent of R21. A preferable carbon number ofR24 including its substituent is in the range of from 3 to 30, morepreferably in the range of from 3 to 20, and furthermore preferably inthe range of from 6 to 12. As the substituent, preferred are an alkylgroup and an aryl group, more preferably an alkyl group. R24 is mostpreferably a 2-ethylhexyl group.

[0194] Herein, the term “primary alkyl group” in this specification isused to mean that, taking, in the carbon skeleton of the alkyl group,the carbon atom bonding to S in formula (I) or (YC-I) as a centralcarbon, the central carbon has at least two hydrogen atoms.

[0195] In formula (YC-I), Xa has the same meaning as described informula (I). Preferable range thereof is also the same.

[0196] In order to render the coupler immobile in the photosensitivematerial, at least one of Qa, R21, Xa and R22 has preferably 8 to 60carbon atoms; more preferably 8 to 50 carbon atoms in totalrespectively, including carbon atoms of substituent(s) that they mayhave.

[0197] It is preferable, in the present invention, that the compoundrepresented by formula (YC-I) is a compound represented by formula(YC-II). Here, the compound represented by formula (YC-II) is alsoreferred to as a yellow dye-forming coupler. The compound represented byformula (YC-II) is explained in detail below.

[0198] In formula (YC-II), R21, R22, R24, mb, and Xa have the samemeanings as described in formula (YC-I). Preferable ranges thereof arealso the same.

[0199] In formula (YC-II), R23 and nb have the same meanings as R3 andna described in formula (II), respectively. Preferable ranges thereofare also the same.

[0200] Preferable specific examples of the coupler represented by any offormula (I), (II), (III), (YC-I) and (YC-II) that can be preferably usedin the present invention are shown below. However, the present inventionis not limited to these compounds. Herein, the present invention alsoembraces tautomers, in which the hydrogen atom at the coupling site (thehydrogen atom on the carbon atom to which X is substituting) istransferred on the nitrogen atom in the C═N portion bonding to thecoupling site.

[0201] In the following explanation, when the exemplified compoundsshown above are referred to, they are expressed as “coupler (x)”, withusing the number x labeled to each of the exemplified compounds in theparenthesis.

[0202] Specific synthetic examples of the dye-forming couplerrepresented by the foregoing formula (I), (II), (III), (YC-I) or (YC-II)are described below.

SYNTHETIC EXAMPLE 1 Synthesis of Coupler (3)

[0203] Coupler (3) was synthesized according to the following synthesisroute:

[0204] To a solution containing 438 g of3-(2,4-di-t-amylphenoxy)propylamine, 210 ml of triethylamine and 1 literof acetonitrile, under ice-cooling, 333 g of orthonitrobenzene sulfonylchloride was added gradually with stirring. The temperature of thereaction system was elevated up to room temperature, and then, agitationwas further continued for 1 hour. To the reaction mixture, ethyl acetateand water were added for separation. The organic layer was washed withdilute hydrochloric acid and saturated brine, and then dried withanhydrous magnesium sulfate. Thereafter, the solvent was distilled offunder a reduced pressure. Crystallization from a mixed solvent of ethylacetate and hexane gave 588 g of compound (A-1).

[0205] To a mixture of 540 ml of isopropanol and 90 ml of water, 84.0 gof a reduced iron and 8.4 g of ammonium chloride were dispersed andheated under reflux for 1 hour. To this dispersion, 119 g of compound(A-1) was gradually added, while stirring. Further, the reaction mixturewas heated under reflux for 2 hours, and then suction-filtered throughcelite. To the filtrate, ethyl acetate and water were added forseparation. The separated organic solvent layer was washed withsaturated brine and dried with anhydrous magnesium sulfate. The solventwas distilled off under a reduced pressure, to obtain 111 g of compound(A-2) as an oily product.

[0206] A solution of 111 g of compound (A-2), 68.4 g of a hydrochlorideof imino ether (A-0) and 150 ml of ethyl alcohol was stirred for 1 hourwhile heating under reflux. Further, 4.9 g of a hydrochloride of iminoether was added and stirred with heating under reflux for 30 minutes.After cooling, the reaction mixture was suction-filtered. To thefiltrate, 100 ml of p-xylene was added and heated under reflux for 4hours, while eliminating ethanol by distillation. The reaction solutionwas purified by silica gel column chromatography using a mixed solventof ethyl acetate and hexane as an eluent. Crystallization from methanolgave 93.1 g of compound (A-3).

[0207] A solution of 40.7 g of compound (A-3), 18.5 g of2-methoxyaniline and 10 ml of p-xylene was stirred while heating underreflux for 6 hours. To the reaction mixture, ethyl acetate and waterwere added for separation. The organic solvent layer was washed withdilute hydrochloric acid and saturated brine, and then dried withanhydrous magnesium sulfate. Thereafter, the solvent was distilled offunder a reduced pressure. The residue was purified by silica gel columnchromatography using a mixed solvent of ethyl acetate and hexane as aneluent, to obtain 37.7 g of compound (A-4) as an oily product.

[0208] To a solution containing 24.8 g of compound (A-4) and 400 ml ofmethylene chloride, under ice-cooling, 35 ml of a methylene chloridesolution containing 2.1 ml of bromine was added dropwise. After stirringfor 30 minutes while cooling on ice, methylene chloride and water wereadded for separation. The separated organic solvent layer was washedwith saturated brine and dried with anhydrous magnesium sulfate. Thesolvent was distilled off under a reduced pressure, to obtain a crudeproduct of compound (A-5).

[0209] To a solution of 15.5 g of 5,5-dimethyloxazolidine-2,4-dione and16.8 ml of triethylamine dissolved in 200 ml of N,N-dimethylacetamide, asolution of the whole quantity of the previously synthesized crudeproduct of compound (A-5) dissolved in 40 ml of acetonitrile was addeddropwise, over 10 minutes, at room temperature. After the temperature ofthe reaction system was elevated up to 40° C., and then, agitation wascontinued for 30 minutes. To the reaction solution, ethyl acetate andwater were added to conduct separation. The separated organic layer waswashed with a 0.1 normal aqueous solution of potassium hydroxide, dilutehydrochloric acid and saturated brine, and then dried with anhydrousmagnesium sulfate. The solvent was eliminated by vacuum distillation.The residue was purified by silica gel column chromatography using amixed solvent of acetone and hexane as an eluent. Crystallization from amixed solvent of ethyl acetate and hexane gave 23.4 g of coupler (3).

SYNTHETIC EXAMPLE 2 Synthesis of Coupler (6) (Synthesis of Coupler(102))

[0210] Coupler (6) was synthesized according to the following synthesisrout.

[0211] To a solution containing 181.2 g of 3-butoxypropylamine, 198.2 mlof triethylamine and 840 ml of toluene, 300.0 g of orthonitrobenzenesulfonyl chloride was added gradually with stirring while ice-cooling.After the temperature of the reaction system was elevated up to 40° C.,agitation was further continued for 1 hour. To the reaction solution, 50ml of hydrochloric acid and 750 ml of water were added for separation.The separated organic layer was washed with 750 ml of an aqueoussolution of sodium bicarbonate, to obtain a reaction solution ofcompound (B-1).

[0212] To a mixture of 8.5 g of 10% Pd/C and 50 ml of water, thepreviously prepared reaction solution of compound (B-1) and 100 ml oftoluene were added, and then 165 g of 80% hydrazine hydrate and 50 ml ofwater were added dropwise over 1 hour at 40° C. Thereafter, the reactionsolution was further stirred for 1 hour at 45° C., and then filteredthrough celite. The reaction mixture was washed with 350 ml of toluene,500 ml of isopropanol and 1.5 liter of water. After separation, theorganic layer was washed twice with 500 ml of water, to obtain areaction solution of compound (B-2). Thereafter, 800 ml of the solventwas eliminated by vacuum concentration. To the resulting residue, 400 mlof toluene, 305.7 g of ethyl 3,3-diethoxyacrylate and 2.6 g of p-toluenesulfonic acid monohydrate were added, and stirred at 85° C. for 30minutes. Further, 13.8 g of 90% sodium ethoxide was added, and then themixture was stirred with heating at 120° C. for 4 hours. After cooling,25 ml of hydrochloric acid and 500 ml of water were added forseparation. Further, 50 g of p-toluene sulfonic acid monohydrate and 500ml of water were added for washing. Thereafter, the solvent waseliminated by concentration under reduced pressure. To the resultingresidue, 600 ml of methanol and 30 ml of water were added forcrystallization. Further, 100 ml of methanol and 110 ml of water wereadded dropwise, and the mixture was cooled to 0° C. The resultingprecipitate was suction-filtered, and then washed with a mixed solventof methanol/water, to obtain 440.1 g of Compound (B-3).

[0213] To a mixture of 343 g of 2-ethylhexanethiol, 800 ml ofN,N-dimethyl acetamide and 364 g of potassium carbonate, 470 g of4-t-butyl-2-nitrochlorobenzene was added under a nitrogen atmosphere,and stirred with heating, at 90° C., for 2 hours. Thereafter, thereaction mixture was poured into 1000 ml of ice water, and thenextracted with 1000 ml of ethyl acetate. The separated organic solventlayer was washed twice with saturated brine, and dried with anhydrousmagnesium sulfate. After separating magnesium sulfate by filtration, thesolvent was distilled off under a reduced pressure, to obtain 806 g ofcompound (B-4) as an oily product.

[0214] To a mixture of 2200 ml of isopropanol and 370 ml of water, 740 gof a reduced iron and 74.0 g of ammonium chloride were dispersed, andstirred with heating under reflux, for 1 hour. To this dispersion, 806 gof compound (B-4) was gradually added. Further, the reaction mixture wasstirred with heating under reflux for 2 hours, and then suction-filteredthrough celite. To the filtrate, ethyl acetate and water were added forseparation. The separated organic solvent layer was washed withsaturated brine, and dried with anhydrous magnesium sulfate. The solventwas distilled off under a reduced pressure, to obtain 671 g of compound(B-5) as an oily product.

[0215] A mixture of 110 g of compound (B-3) and 84.5 g of compound (B-5)was stirred with heating, at the temperature of 145 to 150° C. for 6hours, under a reduced pressure, to obtain a crude product of compound(B-6). To the reaction crude product, 750 ml of toluene was added, andthen 41.2 g of 1,3-dibromo-5,5-dimethylhydantoin was added, withstirring, over 15 minutes, while ice-cooling. After stirring at roomtemperature for 1 hour, water was added for separation. The separatedorganic layer was washed with water, to obtain a reaction solution ofcompound (B-7).

[0216] To a mixture of 39.0 g of 5,5-dimethyloxazolidine-2,4-dione, 41.8g of potassium carbonate and 150 ml of N,N-dimethylacetamide, the wholequantity of the previously synthesized reaction solution of compound(B-7) was added dropwise, over 30 minutes, at room temperature withstirring. Thereafter, the temperature of the reaction system waselevated up to 50° C., and agitation was continued for 2 hours. Afterseparation, the separated organic layer was washed with a 0.1 normalaqueous solution of potassium hydroxide; dilute hydrochloric acid, andwater. The solvent was eliminated by vacuum distillation.Crystallization from a methanol solvent gave 171.6 g of coupler (6).

[0217] Other dye-forming couplers can be also synthesized according tothe above-mentioned method, or according to the method described in U.S.Pat. No. 5,455,149.

[0218] In the silver halide photographic photosensitive material of thepresent invention, the amount to be added of the coupler represented byformula (I), (II), (III), (YC-I) or (YC-II) in the photosensitivematerial is preferably in the range of from 0.01 g to 1.0 g, morepreferably in the range of from 0.1 g to 2 g, per m² of thephotosensitive material. The amount of the coupler to be added in aphotosensitive emulsion layer is preferably in the range of from 1×10⁻³mol to 1 mol, and more preferably in the range of from 2×10⁻³ mol to3×10⁻¹ mol, per mol of silver halide in the same photosensitive emulsionlayer.

[0219] Next, the compound represented by formula (Ph) that is preferablyused in combination with the alkenylcarbonyl-sereis compound for use inthe present invention, is explained in detail below.

[0220] In formula (Ph), R_(b1) represents an aliphatic group, an arylgroup, a carbamoyl group, an acylamino group (this group is alsoreferred to as an amino group), a carbonyl group (this group is alsoreferred to as an acyl group), or a sulfonyl group. R_(b2), R_(b3),R_(b4) and R_(b5) each represent a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, ahydroxyl group, an aliphatic group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group,an alkyloxy group, an aryloxy group, a heterocyclic oxy group, anoxycarbonyl group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, an oxycarbonyloxygroup, a carbamoyl group, an acylamino group, a sulfonyl group, asulfinyl group, a sulfamoyl group, an alkylthio group, or an arylthiogroup.

[0221] The compound represented by formula (Ph) is explained in moredetail below.

[0222] R_(b1) represents an aliphatic group, an aryl group, a carbamoylgroup, an acylamino group, a carbonyl group, or a sulfonyl group.Further, each of these groups may be further substituted with othersubstituent(s). Examples of the aliphatic group include a methyl group,an ethyl group, an i-propyl group, a t-butyl group, a t-octyl group, anda cyclohexyl group. Examples of the aryl group include a phenyl groupand a naphthyl group. Examples of the carbamoyl group include aN,N-diethylcarbamoyl group, a N,N-dibutylcarbamoyl group, ahexylcarbamoyl group, and a N,N-diphenylcarbamoyl group. Examples of theacylamino group include a butylamido group, a hexylamido group, anoctylamido group, and a benzamido group. Examples of the carbonyl groupinclude a hexyloxycarbonyl group, an octyloxycarbonyl group, and adodecyloxycarbonyl group. Examples of the sulfonyl group include abutylsulfonyl group, an octylsulfonyl group, and a dodecylsulfonylgroup.

[0223] R_(b2), R_(b3), R_(b4) and R_(b5) each independently represent ahydrogen atom, a halogen atom (for example, fluorine, chlorine, bromine,iodine), a hydroxyl group, an alkyl group (for example, methyl, ethyl,butyl, allyl), an aryl group (for example, phenyl, naphthyl), aheterocyclic group (for example, piperidyl, pyrrolyl, indolyl), analiphatic oxy group (for example, methoxy, octyloxy, cyclohexyloxy), anaryloxy group (for example, phenoxy, naphthoxy), a heterocyclic oxygroup (for example, piperidyloxy, pyrrolyloxy, indolyloxy), anoxycarbonyl group (for example, methoxycarbonyl, hexadecyloxycarbonyl,phenoxycarbonyl, p-chlorophenoxycarbonyl), an acyl group (for example,acetyl, pivaloyl, methacryloyl), an acyloxy group (for example, acetoxy,benzoyloxy), an oxycarbonyloxy group (for example, methoxycarbonyloxy,octyloxycarbonyloxy, phenoxycarbonyloxy), a carbamoyl group (forexample, N,N-dimethylcarbamoyl, N,N-diethylcarbamoyl, diphenylcarbamoyl,hexylcarbamoyl), an acylamino group (for example, heptylamido,undecylamido, pentadecylamido, 1-hexylnonylamido), a sulfonyl group(including an aliphatic sulfonyl group and an arylsulfonyl group, forexample, methane sulfonyl, butane sulfonyl, octane sulfonyl, benzenesulfonyl, p-toluene sulfonyl), a sulfinyl group (for example, methanesulfinyl, octane sulfinyl, benzene sulfinyl, p-toluene sulfinyl), asulfamoyl group (for example, dimethylsulfamoyl), an alkylthio group(for example, methylthio, octylthio, dodecylthio), or an arylthio group(for example, phenylthio). Further, R_(b1) to R_(b5) each may be alinking group that links at least two phenol skeletons (mother nuclei).

[0224] As R_(b1), an alkyl group, a carbonyl group and an acylaminogroup are preferable. An alkyl group is more preferable of all. A methylgroup is particularly preferred. As R_(b2), an amido group, an aliphaticoxy group and an alkylene-linking group are preferable. In the case ofthe alkylene-linking group, it is preferred that two phenol skeletonsare linked via the linking group.

[0225] Preferable structures of the compounds represented by formula(Ph) are shown below.

[0226] The compounds represented by formula (Ph-1) are explained indetail below.

[0227] R_(b6) represents an aliphatic group, an aryl group, an aminogroup, or an acyl group. R_(b1) has the same meaning as defined informula (Ph) and the same preferable range as described above withrespective to the R_(b1). R_(b7), R_(b8) and R_(b9) each independentlyhave the same meanings as R_(b2) to R_(b5) defined in formula (Ph) andthe same preferable ranges as described above with respective to theR_(b2) to R_(b5). R_(b6) is preferably an aliphatic group, morepreferably an unsubstituted aliphatic group, and especially preferably abranched aliphatic group. The total of carbon atoms in R_(b6) ispreferably in the range of from 8 to 25, especially preferably in therange of from 12 to 20. R_(b1) is preferably an aliphatic group, an arylgroup, a carbamoyl group, or an oxycarbonyl group, more preferably analiphatic group, and especially preferably a methyl group. R_(b7),R_(b8) and R_(b9) each are preferably a hydrogen atom or an aliphaticgroup, especially preferably a hydrogen atom.

[0228] The compounds represented by formula (Ph-2) are explained indetail below.

[0229] R_(b1) has the same meaning as defined in formula (Ph) and thesame preferable range as described above with respective to the R_(b1)in formula (Ph). R_(b10) represents a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group(for example, butyl, benzyl), an acyl group (for example, acryloyl,1-methylacryloyl, 2-methylacryloyl), an oxycarbonyl group (for example,methoxycarbonyl, butoxycarbonyl, phenoxycarbonyl), a silyl group, or aphosphoryl group. X_(b) represents an alkylene group (for example,methylene, ethylene, propylene, isopropylmethylene, pentylmethylene), aphenylene group (for example, phenylene), —O—, or —S—. R_(b11) toR_(b16) each independently have the same meaning as R_(b2) to R_(b5)defined in formula (Ph) and the same preferable ranges as describedabove with respective to each of them.

[0230] From the viewpoint of improvement in fastness to light, R_(b10)is preferably a hydrogen atom, an acyl group or an alkyl group, morepreferably a hydrogen atom or an acyl group. It is especially preferredfrom the viewpoint of improvement in fastness to light that R_(b10) is ahydrogen atom. However, if R_(b10) is a hydrogen atom, the compoundrepresented by formula (Ph-2) itself reacts with an oxidation product ofa paraphenylene diamine to develop a cyan color, thereby causing a colormixing, which is not preferable. Therefore, from this aspect, it is notmost preferred that R_(b10) is a hydrogen atom. X_(b) is preferably analkylene-linking group, more preferably —CHR_(b21) (R_(b21) represents ahydrogen atom, an aliphatic group, or an aryl group). R_(b21) isespecially preferably an aliphatic group. R_(b11) and R_(b14) each arepreferably an aliphatic group, more preferably an aliphatic group having6 or less carbon atoms, and especially preferably a methyl group.

[0231] R_(b1) is preferably an aliphatic group, an aryl group, acarbamoyl group, or an oxycarbonyl group, more preferably an aliphaticgroup, and especially preferably a methyl group. R_(b12), R_(b13),R_(b15) and R_(b16) each are preferably a hydrogen atom or an aliphaticgroup, and especially preferably a hydrogen atom.

[0232] The compounds represented by formula (Ph-3) are explained indetail below.

[0233] R_(b17) and R_(b18) each independently represent an aliphaticgroup, or an aryl group. R_(b1) has the same meaning as defined informula (Ph) and the same preferable range as described above withrespective to the R_(b1). R_(b19) and R_(b20) each have the samemeanings as R_(b2) to R_(b5) defined in formula (Ph) and the samepreferable ranges as described above with respective to each of them.

[0234] R_(b17) and R_(b18) each are preferably an aliphatic group.R_(b19) and R_(b20) each are preferably a hydrogen atom or an aliphaticgroup, and especially preferably a hydrogen atom. R_(b1) is preferably acarbamoyl group, an oxycarbonyl group or an aliphatic group, especiallypreferably a carbamoyl group or an oxycarbonyl group.

[0235] Preferable specific examples of the compounds represented byformula (Ph) that can be used in the present invention are shown below,but the present invention is not limited to these compounds.

[0236] The compound represented by formula (Ph) for use in the presentinvention may be used solely or in combination with two or more kinds ofthese compounds. It is preferred that at least one compound representedby formula (Ph) for use in the present invention is added to the layerincorporating therein the dye-forming coupler represented by formula (I)for use in the present invention.

[0237] The compound represented by formula (Ph) for use in the presentinvention, if used in combination with the alkenylcarbonyl-sereiscompound described above, enables to inhibit discoloration, thereby toimprove image fastness after processing. The addition amount of thecompound represented by formula (Ph) for use in the present invention ispreferably in the range of from 10 mole % to 200 mole %, more preferablyin the range of from 20 mole % to 150 mole %, especially preferably inthe range of from 40 mole % to 120 mole %, to the dye-forming coupler,respectively.

[0238] Next, a concrete synthesis example of the compounds representedby formula (Ph) is shown below.

SYNTHETIC EXAMPLE Synthesis of (Ph-A22)

[0239] To 28.7 g (0.233 mole) of 2-amino-p-cresol and 38.6 g (0.460mole) of sodium bicarbonate, 126 ml of acetonitrile was added and 63.2 g(0.23 mole) of isopalmitinic acid chloride was added dropwise over 30minutes with heating and stirring. After additional heating and stirringfor 1 hour, 100 ml of methanol was added thereto. The resultinginsoluble residue was separated by filter and washed with 100 ml ofmethanol. To the thus-obtained solution, 50 ml of water was addeddropwise over 25 minutes with stirring at room temperature forcrystallization. Further stirring was continued for 2 hours withwater-cooling. The precipitated crystals were separated by filter andwashed with 250 ml of methanol/water=5/1, and further washed with 250 mlof water. The thus-obtained crystals were dried at 45° C. for 1 day bymeans of a blast drier. 80.5 g of white crystals were obtained. Yield:96.8%, Melting point: 82 to 84° C.

[0240] Other compounds can also be synthesized in the similar manner asin the method set forth above.

[0241] The compounds represented by any one of formulae (E-1) to (E-3)that can be preferably used in the photosensitive material of thepresent invention are explained in detail below.

[0242] In formulae (E-1), (E-2), and (E-3), R₄₁ represents an aliphaticgroup, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an acyl group, an aliphaticoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, an aliphatic sulfonylgroup, an arylsulfonyl group, a phosphoryl group, or —Si(R₄₇)(R₄₈)(R₄₉)in which R₄₇, R₄₈ and R₄₉ each independently represent an aliphaticgroup, an aryl group, an aliphatic oxy group, or an aryloxy group. R₄₂,R₄₃, R₄₅ and R₄₆ each independently represent a hydrogen atom, or asubstituent. Ra₁, Ra₂, Ra₃, and Ra₄ each independently represent ahydrogen atom, or an aliphatic group (for example, methyl, ethyl).

[0243] With respect to the compounds represented by any one of formulae(E-1) to (E-3), the groups preferable in the present invention, areexplained below.

[0244] In formulae (E-1) to (E-3), it is preferred that R₄₁ representsan aliphatic group, an acyl group, an aliphatic oxycarbonyl group, anaryloxycarbonyl group, or a phosphoryl group, and R₄₂, R₄₃, R₄₅ and R₄₆each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group, analiphatic oxy group, or an acylamino group. It is more preferred thatR₄₁ represents an aliphatic group, and R₄₂, R₄₃, R₄₅ and R₄₆ eachindependently represent a hydrogen atom, or an aliphatic group.

[0245] Preferable specific examples of the compounds represented by anyone of formulae (E-1) to (E-3) for use in the present invention areshown below, but the present invention is not limited to thesecompounds.

[0246] The compound represented by any one of formulae (E-1) to (E-3)for use in the present invention may be used solely or in combinationwith two or more kinds of these compounds. Further, the layer to whichthe compound represented by any one of formulae (E-1) to (E-3) for usein the present invention is added may be different from, or identical toa layer incorporating therein the dye-forming coupler represented byformula (I). It is preferred that the compound represented by any one offormulae (E-1) to (E-3) and the dye-forming coupler represented byformula (I) are added to the identical layer. Further, it is preferredthat the compound represented by any one of formulae (E-1) to (E-3) isused in combination with the compound represented by formula (Ph).

[0247] The compound represented by any one of formulae (E-1) to (E-3)that can be preferably used in the present invention, if used incombination with the alkenylcarbonyl-sereis compound described above andthe compound represented by formula (Ph) (preferably, these allcompounds are added to the identical layer), enables to further improveimage fastness after processing. The addition amount of the compoundrepresented by any one of formulae (E-1) to (E-3) that can be preferablyused in the present invention, is preferably in the range of from 10mole % to 100 mole %, more preferably in the range of from 20 mole % to80 mole %, especially preferably in the range of from 30 mole % to 60mole %, to the dye-forming coupler, respectively.

[0248] Next, a compound represented by any one of formulae (TS-I) to(TS-VII), a metal complex, a ultraviolet absorbing agent, and awater-insoluble homopolymer or copolymer, each of which can bepreferably used in the present invention in combination with theabove-described alkenylcarbonyl-sereis compound and the compoundrepresented by formula (Ph), or in combination with the compoundrepresented by any one of formulae (E-1) to (E-3) as well as theabove-described alkenylcarbonyl-sereis compound and the compoundrepresented by formula (Ph), are explained in detail below.

[0249] First, the compounds represented by any one of formulae (TS-I) to(TS-VII) are explained in detail below.

[0250] The compound represented by formula (TS-I) is described in moredetail.

[0251] In formula (TS-I), R₅₁ represents a hydrogen atom, an aliphaticgroup (e.g., methyl, i-propyl, s-butyl, dodecyl, methoxyethyl, allyl,benzyl), an aryl group (e.g., phenyl, p-methoxyphenyl), a heterocyclicgroup (e.g., 2-tetrahydrofuryl, pyranyl), an acyl group (e.g., acetyl,pivaroyl, benzoyl, acryloyl), an aliphatic oxycarbonyl group (e.g.,methoxycarbonyl, hexadecyloxycarbonyl), an aryloxycarbonyl group (e.g.,phenoxycarbonyl, p-methoxy phenoxycarbonyl), an aliphatic sulfonyl group(e.g., methane sulfonyl, butane sulfonyl), an aryl sulfonyl group (e.g.,benzene sulfonyl, p-toluene sulfonyl), a phosphoryl group (e.g., diethylphosphoryl, diphenyl phosphoryl, diphenoxy phosphoryl), or—Si(R₅₈)(R₅₉)(R₆₀). R₅₈, R₅₉, and R₆₀, which may be the same ordifferent from each other, each independently represent an aliphaticgroup (e.g., methyl, ethyl, t-butyl, benzyl, allyl), an aryl group(e.g., phenyl), an aliphatic oxy group (e.g., methoxy, butoxy), or anaryloxy group (e.g., phenoxy).

[0252] X₅₁ represents —O— or —N(R₅₇)—, in which R₅₇ has the same meaningas R₅₁. X₅₅ represents —N═ or —C(R₅₂)═, X₅₆ represents —N═ or —C(R₅₄)═,X₅₇ represents —N═ or —C(R₅₆)═. R₅₂, R₅₃, R₅₄, R₅₅, and R₅₆ eachindependently represent a hydrogen atom, or a substituent. As thepreferable substituent exemplified are an aliphatic group (e.g., methyl,t-butyl, t-hexyl, benzyl), an aryl group (e.g., phenyl), an aliphaticoxycarbonyl group (e.g., methoxycarbonyl, dodecyloxycarbonyl), anaryloxycarbonyl group (e.g., phenoxycarbonyl), an aliphatic sulfonylgroup (e.g., methane sulfonyl, butane sulfonyl), an aryl sulfonyl group(e.g., benzene sulfonyl, p-hydroxybenzene sulfonyl), or —X₅₁—R₅₁.

[0253] However, all of R₅₁ to R₅₇ cannot simultaneously representhydrogen atoms, respectively, and the total number of carbon atoms ineach of these groups is generally 10 or more (preferably 10 to 50), andmore preferably 16 or more (preferably 16 to 40). Further, the compoundrepresented by formula (TS-I) is neither identical to the compoundrepresented by formula (Ph) nor the compound represented by any one offormulae (E-1) to (E-3). In other words, both the compound representedby formula (Ph) and the compound represented by any one of formulae(E-1) to (E-3) are excluded from the compound represented by formula(TS-I).

[0254] The compound represented by formula (TS-I) for use in the presentinvention includes those compounds represented by any of, for example,formula (I) of JP-B-63-50691 (“JP-B” means examined Japanese patentpublication), formula (IIIa), (IIIb), or (IIIc) of JP-B-2-37575, formulaof JP-B-2-50457, formula of JP-B-5-67220, formula (IX) of JP-B-5-70809,formula of JP-B-6-19534, formula (I) of JP-A-62-227889, formula (I) or(II) of JP-A-62-244046, formula (I) or (II) of JP-A-2-66541, formula(II) or (III) of JP-A-2-139544, formula (I) of JP-A-2-194062, formula(B), (C), or (D) of JP-A-2-212836, formula (III) of JP-A-3-200758,formula (II) or (III) of JP-A-3-48845, formula (B), (C), or (D) ofJP-A-3-266836, formula (I) of JP-A-3-969440, formula (I) ofJP-A-4-330440, formula (I) of JP-A-5-297541, formula of JP-A-6-130602,formula (1), (2), or (3) of International Patent Application PublicationWO 91/11749, formula (I) of German Patent Publication DE4,008,785A1,formula (II) of U.S. Pat. No. 4,931,382, formula (a) of European PatentNo. 203,746B1, formula (I) of European Patent No. 264,730B1, and formula(III) of JP-A-62-89962. These compounds can be synthesized according tothe methods described in these publications, or general methodsdescribed in Shin Jikken Kagaku Koza, Vol. 14 (Maruzen Co., Ltd.) (1977,1978).

[0255] In the present invention, the compound represented by formula(TS-I) is preferably any of those compounds represented by any one offormulae (TS-ID), (TS-IE), (TS-IF), (TS-IG), and (TS-IH) shown below.

[0256] In formulae (TS-ID) to (TS-IH), R₅₁, R₅₂, R₅₃, R₅₄, R₅₅, R₅₆,R₅₇, and X₅₁ have the same meanings as those defined in formula (TS-I).X₅₂ and X₅₃ each independently represent a divalent linking group.Examples of the divalent linking group include an alkylene group, an oxygroup, and a sulfonyl group. In the formulae, the same symbols in thesame molecule may be the same or different in meanings.

[0257] The compound represented by any one of formulae (TS-ID) to(TS-IG) is neither identical to the compound represented by formula (Ph)nor the compound represented by any one of formulae (E-1) to (E-3).

[0258] As to the compounds represented by any one of formulae (TS-ID) to(TS-IH), the groups thereon preferable in the present invention aredescribed below.

[0259] In formula (TS-ID), preferable is the case where R₅₁ is ahydrogen atom, an aliphatic group, an acyl group, an aliphaticoxycarbonyl group, an aryl oxycarbonyl group, or a phosphoryl group, andR₅₂, R₅₃, R₅₅, and R₅₆ each independently are a hydrogen atom, analiphatic group, an aliphatic oxy group, or an acyl amino group. Morepreferable is the case where R₅₁ is an aliphatic group, and R₅₂, R₅₃,R₅₅, and R₅₆ each independently are a hydrogen atom, or an aliphaticgroup. In formulae (TS-IE), (TS-IF), and (TS-IG), preferable is the casewhere R₅₁ is a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group, an acyl group, analiphatic oxycarbonyl group, an aryl oxycarbonyl group, or a phosphorylgroup, and R₅₂, R₅₃, R₅₅, and R₅₆ each independently are a hydrogenatom, an aliphatic group, an aliphatic oxy group, or an acyl aminogroup, and R₅₄ is an aliphatic group, a carbamoyl group, or an acylamino group, and X₅₂ and X₅₃ each independently are an alkylene group oran oxy group. More preferable is the case where R₅₁ is a hydrogen atom,an aliphatic group, an acyl group, or a phosphoryl group, and R₅₂, R₅₃,R₅₅, and R₅₆ each independently are a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group,an aliphatic oxy group, or an acylamino group, and R₅₄ is an aliphaticgroup, or a carbamoyl group, and X₅₂ and X₅₃ each are —CHR₁₅₈— (R₁₅₈ isan alkyl group). In formula (TS-IH), preferable is the case where R₅₁ isan aliphatic group, an aryl group, or a heterocyclic group, and R₅₃ andR₅₅ each independently are an aliphatic oxy group, an aryloxy group, ora heterocyclic oxy group. More preferable is the case where R₅₁ is anaryl group, or a heterocyclic group, and R₅₃ and R₅₅ each independentlyare an aryloxy group, or a heterocyclic oxy group.

[0260] In the present invention, the compounds represented by formula(TS-I) are preferably the compounds represented by formula (TS-IE) or(TS-IG).

[0261] The compound represented by formula (TS-II) is described indetail below.

[0262] In formula (TS-II), R₆₁, R₆₂, R₆₃, and R₆₄ each independently area hydrogen atom, or an aliphatic group (preferably an alkyl group, e.g.,methyl, ethyl), X₆₁ represents a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group(e.g., methyl, ethyl, allyl), an aliphatic oxy group (e.g., methoxy,octyloxy, cyclohexyloxy), an aliphatic oxycarbonyl group (e.g.,methoxycarbonyl, hexadecyl oxycarbonyl), an aryloxycarbonyl group (e.g.,phenoxycarbonyl, p-chlorophenoxycarbonyl), an acyl group (e.g., acetyl,pivaloyl, methacryloyl), an acyloxy group (e.g., acetoxy, benzoyloxy),an aliphatic oxycarbonyloxy group (e.g., methoxycarbonyloxy,octyloxycarbonyloxy), an aryloxycarbonyloxy group (e.g.,phenoxycarbonyloxy), an aliphatic sulfonyl group (e.g., methanesulfonyl, butane sulfonyl), an aryl sulfonyl group (e.g., benzenesulfonyl, p-toluene sulfonyl), an aliphatic sulfinyl group (e.g.,methane sulfinyl, octane sulfinyl), an arylsulfinyl group (e.g., benzenesulfinyl, p-toluene sulfinyl), a sulfamoyl group (e.g.,dimethylsulfamoyl), a carbamoyl group (e.g., dimethylcarbamoyl,diethylcarbamoyl), a hydroxyl group, or an oxy radical group. X₆₂represents a group of non-metal atoms necessary to form a 5- to7-membered ring (e.g., piperidine ring, piperazine ring). The totalnumber of carbon atoms of the compound represented by formula (TS-II) is8 or more (preferably 8 to 60).

[0263] The compound represented by formula (TS-II) for use in thepresent invention include those compounds represented by, for example,formula (I) of JP-B-2-32298, formula (I) of JP-B-3-39296, formula ofJP-B-3-40373, formula (I) of JP-A-2-49762, formula (II) ofJP-A-2-208653, formula (III) of JP-A-2-217845, formula (B) of U.S. Pat.No. 4,906,555, formula of European Patent Publication EP309,400A2,formula of European Patent Publication EP309,401A1, and formula ofEuropean Patent Publication EP309,402A1. These compounds can besynthesized according to the methods described in these publications orgeneral methods described in Shin Jikken Kagaku Koza, Vol. 14 (MaruzenCo., Ltd.) (1977, 1978).

[0264] As to the compound represented by formula (TS-II), the groupsthereon preferable in the present invention are described below. In thepresent invention, R₆₁, R₆₂, R₆₃ and R₆₄ each are preferably analiphatic group, and more preferably a methyl group. In the presentinvention, X₆₁ is preferably a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group, analiphatic oxy group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, or an oxyradicalgroup; more preferably a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group, an aliphaticoxy group, an acyl group, or an oxyradical group; and most preferably analiphatic group, or an aliphatic oxy group. In the present invention,X₆₂ forms preferably a 6-membered ring, more preferably a piperidinering. In the present invention, the compound represented by formula(TS-II) is preferably in an embodiment where R₆₁, R₆₂, R₆₃, and R₆₄ eachare a methyl group, X₆₁ is a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group, analiphatic oxy group, an acyl group, or an oxy radical group, and X₆₂forms a 6-membered ring; and more preferably in an embodiment where R₆₁,R₆₂, R₆₃, and R₆₄ each are a methyl group, X₆₁ is an aliphatic group, oran aliphatic oxy group, and X₆₂ forms a piperidine ring.

[0265] The compound represented by formula (TS-III) is described in moredetail below.

[0266] In formula (TS-III), R₆₅ and R₆₆ each independently represent ahydrogen atom, an aliphatic group (e.g., methyl, ethyl, t-butyl, octyl,methoxyethyl), an aryl group (e.g., phenyl, 4-methoxyphenyl), an acylgroup (e.g., acetyl, pivaloyl, methacryloyl), an aliphatic oxycarbonylgroup (e.g., methoxycarbonyl, hexadecyl oxycarbonyl), an aryloxycarbonylgroup (e.g., phenoxycarbonyl), a carbamoyl group (e.g.,dimethylcarbamoyl, phenylcarbamoyl), an aliphatic sulfonyl group (e.g.,methane sulfonyl, butane sulfonyl), or an aryl sulfonyl group (e.g.,benzene sulfonyl). R₆₇ represents a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group(e.g., methyl, ethyl, t-butyl, octyl, methoxyethyl), an aliphatic oxygroup (e.g., methoxy, octyloxy), an aryloxy group (e.g., phenoxy,p-methoxyphenoxy), an aliphatic thio group (e.g., methylthio,octylthio), an arylthio group (e.g., phenylthio, p-methoxyphenylthio),an acyloxy group (e.g., acetoxy, pivaloyloxy), an aliphaticoxycarbonyloxy group (e.g., methoxycarbonyloxy, octyloxycarbonyloxy), anaryloxycarbonyloxy group (e.g., phenoxycarbonyloxy), a substituted aminogroup (the substituent may be any one that is able to substitute for thehydrogen atom(s) on the amino group, e.g., amino groups substituted witha substituent such as an aliphatic group, an aryl group, an acyl group,an aliphatic sulfonyl group or an arylsulfonyl group), a heterocyclicgroup (e.g., a piperidine ring, a thiomorpholine ring), or a hydroxylgroup. If possible, each combination of R₆₅ and R₆₆, R₆₆ and R₆₇, andR₆₅ and R₆₇ combine together to form a 5- to 7-membered ring (e.g. amorpholine ring and a pyrazolidine ring), but they never form a2,2,6,6-tetraalkylpiperidine ring. In addition, both R₆₅ and R₆₆ are nothydrogen atoms at the same time. Further, the total number of carbonatoms of the compound represented by formula (TS-III) is generally 7 ormore (preferably 7 to 50).

[0267] The compound represented by formula (TS-III) for use in thepresent invention include compounds represented by, for example, formula(I) of JP-B-6-97332, formula (I) of JP-B-6-97334, formula (I) ofJP-A-2-148037, formula (I) of JP-A-2-150841, formula (I) ofJP-A-2-181145, formula (I) of JP-A-3-266836, formula (IV) ofJP-A-4-350854, and formula (I) of JP-A-5-61166. These compounds can besynthesized according to the methods described in these publications orgeneral methods described in Shin Jikken Kagaku Koza, Vol. 14 (MaruzenCo., Ltd.) (1977, 1978).

[0268] In the present invention, the compounds represented by formula(TS-III) are preferably the compounds represented by any one of formulae(TS-IIIA), (TS-IIIB), (TS-IIIC), and (TS-IIID) shown below.

[0269] In formulae (TS-IIIA) to (TS-IIID), R₆₅ and R₆₆ each have thesame meanings as those defined in formula (TS-III). R_(c1), R_(c2),R_(c3), and R_(c5) each independently have the same meaning as R₆₅.R_(c4) represents a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group (e.g., octyl,dodecyl, 3-phenoxypropyl), or an aryl group (e.g., phenyl,4-dodecyloxyphenyl). X₆₃ represents a group of non-metal atoms necessaryto form, together with the —N—N—, a 5- to 7-membered ring, such as apyrazolidine ring and a pyrazoline ring.

[0270] As to the compounds represented by any one of formulae (TS-IIIA)to (TS-IIID), the groups thereon preferable in the present invention aredescribed below. In formula (TS-IIIA), preferable is the case where R₆₅and R_(c1) each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an aliphaticgroup, or an aryl group, and R₆₆ and R_(c2) each independently representan aliphatic group, an aryl group, or an acyl group; and more preferableis the case where R₆₅ and R_(c1) each independently represent analiphatic group, and R₆₆ and R_(c2) each independently represent analiphatic group, an aryl group, or an acyl group. In formula (TS-IIIB),preferable is the case where R₆₅ represents a hydrogen atom, analiphatic group, an aryl group, an acyl group, or an aliphaticoxycarbonyl group, R_(c3) represents an aliphatic group, an aryl group,or an acyl group, and X₆₃ represents a group of non-metal atomsnecessary to form a 5-membered ring; and more preferable is the casewhere R₆₅ represents a hydrogen atom, or an aliphatic group, and R_(c3)represents an aliphatic group, or an aryl group, and X₆₃ represents agroup of non-metal atoms that forms a pyrazolidine ring. In formula(TS-IIIC), preferable is the case where R₆₅ and R₆₆ each independentlyrepresent a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group, an aryl group, an acylgroup, an aliphatic oxycarbonyl group, or an aryl oxycarbonyl group, andR_(c3) represents a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group, or an acyl group;and more preferable is the case where R₆₅ and R₆₆ each independentlyrepresent an aliphatic group, an acyl group, or an aliphatic oxycarbonylgroup, and R_(c3) represents a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group, or anacyl group. In formula (TS-IIID), preferable is the case where R₆₅represents a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group, an aryl group, an acylgroup, or a carbamoyl group, R_(c5) represents an aliphatic group, or anaryl group, and R_(c4) represents an aliphatic group, or an aryl group;and more preferable is the case where R₆₅ represents an aliphatic group,an aryl group, an acyl group, or a carbamoyl group, R_(c5) represents analiphatic group, or an aryl group, and R_(c4) represents an aliphaticgroup, or an aryl group.

[0271] In the present invention, the compounds represented by formula(TS-III) are more preferably those compounds represented by any one offormulae (TS-IIIB), (TS-IIIC), and (TS-IIID), and most preferably thosecompounds represented by formula (TS-IIIB), or (TS-IIIC).

[0272] The compound represented by formula (TS-IV) is described in moredetail below.

[0273] In formula (TS-IV), R₇₁, and R₇₂ each independently represent analiphatic group (e.g., methyl, methoxycarbonylethyl,dodecyloxycarbonylethyl, benzyl), an aryl group (e.g., phenyl,4-octyloxyphenyl, 2-butoxy-5-(t)octylphenyl), or a heterocyclic group(e.g., 2-pyridyl, 2-pyrimidyl). Further, R₇₁ represents a hydrogen atom,Li, Na, or K. R₇₁ and R₇₂ may combine together to form a 5- to7-membered ring, such as a tetrahydrothiophene ring and a thiomorpholinering. q represents 0, 1, or 2. In the above, the total number of carbonatoms of R₇₁ and R₇₂ is 10 or more, preferably 10 to 60.

[0274] The compound represented by formula (TS-IV) for use in thepresent invention include compounds represented by, for example, formula(I) of JP-B-2-44052, formula (T) of JP-A-3-48242, formula (A) ofJP-A-3-266836, formula (I), (II) or (III) of JP-A-5-323545, formula (I)of JP-A-6-148837, formula (I) of U.S. Pat. No. 4,933,271, and formula(I) of U.S. Pat. No. 4,770,987. These compounds can be synthesizedaccording to the methods described in these publications or generalmethods described in Shin Jikken Kagaku Koza, Vol. 14 (Maruzen Co.,Ltd.) (1977, 1978).

[0275] In the present invention, in formula (TS-IV), q is preferably 0or 2. When q is 0, it is preferable that R₇₁ and R₇₂ each independentlyrepresent an aliphatic group, or an aryl group, or that R₇₁ and R₇₂combine together to form a 6-membered ring. When q is 2, it ispreferable that R₇₁ represents a hydrogen atom, Na, K, an aliphaticgroup, or an aryl group, and R₇₂ represents an aliphatic group, or anaryl group; it is more preferable that R₇₁ represents a hydrogen atom,Na, or K, and R₇₂ represents an aryl group.

[0276] The compound represented by formula (TS-V) is described in moredetail below.

[0277] In formula (TS-V), R₈₁, R₈₂, and R₈₃ each independently representan aliphatic group (e.g., methyl, ethyl, t-octyl, allyl), an aryl group(e.g., phenyl, 4-t-butylphenyl, 4-vinylphenyl), an aliphatic oxy group(e.g., methoxy, t-octyloxy), an aryloxy group (e.g., phenoxy,2,4-di-t-butylphenoxy), an aliphatic amino group (e.g., butyl amino,dibutyl amino), or an arylamino group (e.g., anilino, 4-methoxyanilino,N-methylanilino), and t represents 0 or 1. Each combination of R₈₁ andR₈₂, and R₈₁ and R₈₃ may combine together to form a 5- to 8-memberedring. The number of total carbon atoms of R₈₁, R₈₂, and R₈₃ is 10 ormore (preferably 10 to 50).

[0278] The compound represented by formula (TS-V) for use in the presentinvention include compounds represented by, for example, formula (I) ofJP-A-3-25437, formula (I) of JP-A-3-142444, formula of U.S. Pat. No.4,749,645, and formula of U.S. Pat. No. 4,980,275. These compounds canbe synthesized according to the methods described in these publicationsor general methods described in Shin Jikken Kagaku Koza, Vol. 14(Maruzen Co., Ltd.) (1977, 1978).

[0279] In formula (TS-V), in the present invention, preferable is thecase where t is 1, and R₈₁, R₈₂ and R₈₃ each independently represent analiphatic group, an aryl group, an aliphatic oxy group, an aryloxy, oran arylamino group (more preferably at least one of R₈₁, R₈₂, and R₈₃ isan aliphatic group, an aryl group, an aliphatic oxy group, or an aryloxygroup). Also preferable is the case where R₈₁ and R₈₂ combine togetherto form an 8-membered ring. More preferable is the case where t is 1,and R₈₁, R₈₂, and R₈₃ each independently represent an aryl group, analiphatic oxy group, or an aryloxy group (more preferably at least oneof R₈₁, R₈₂, and R₈₃ is an aryl group, or an aryloxy group).

[0280] The compound represented by formula (TS-VI) is described in moredetail below.

[0281] In formula (TS-VI), R₈₅, R₈₆, R₈₇, and R₈₈ each independentlyrepresent a hydrogen atom or a substituent (prefearbly a substituentexcept a carbonyl group, e.g., an aliphatic group, an aryl group, aphosphoryl group, an acylamino group, or a carbamoyl group). However,all of R₈₅, R₈₆, R₈₇, and R₈₈ cannot simultaneously represent hydrogenatoms, respectively. Any two of R₈₅, R₈₆, R₈₇, and R₈₈ may combinetogether to form a 5- to 7-membered ring (e.g., a cyclohexene ring, acyclohexane ring), however the ring is not an aromatic ring consistingonly of carbon atoms. The total number of carbon atoms of the compoundrepresented by formula (TS-VI) is 10 or more (preferably 10 to 50).Further, the compound represented by formula (TS-VI) is not identical tothe above-described alkenylcarbonyl-sereis compound.

[0282] The compound represented by formula (TS-VI) for use in thepresent invention include compounds represented by, for example, formula(I) of U.S. Pat. No. 4,713,317, formula (I) of JP-A-8-44017, formula (I)of JP-A-8-44018, formula (I) of JP-A-8-44019, formula (I) or (II) ofJP-A-8-44020, formula (I) of JP-A-8-44021 and formula (I) or (II) ofJP-A-8-44022. These compounds can be synthesized according to themethods described in these publications or general methods described inShin Jikken Kagaku Koza, Vol. 14 (Maruzen Co., Ltd.) (1977, 1978).

[0283] In the present invention, the compounds represented by formula(TS-VI) are preferably the compounds represented by formula (TS-VIB) or(TS-VIC).

[0284] In formulae (TS-VIB) and (TS-VIC), R₈₅ has the same meaning asdefined in formula (TS-VI). R_(d2) and R_(d3) each independentlyrepresent an alkenyl group (e.g., vinyl, allyl, oleyl). R_(d4)represents a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group (e.g., methyl, allyl,vinyl, octyl), or an aryl group (e.g., phenyl, naphthyl, 4-vinylphenyl).u and v each independently represent 1, 2 or 3.

[0285] As to the compounds represented by formulae (TS-VIB) or (TS-VIC),the groups thereon preferable in the present invention are describedbelow. In formula (TS-VIB), preferable is the case where R₈₅ is analiphatic group or an aryl group, R_(d2) is an alkenyl group, and u is1, 2 or 3; and more preferable is the case where R₈₅ is an aliphaticgroup or an aryl group, R_(d2) is an alkenyl group, and u is 2 or 3. Informula (TS-VIC), preferable is the case where R₈₅ is an aliphatic groupor an aryl group, R_(d3) is an alkenyl group, R_(d4) is a hydrogen atom,or an aliphatic group, and v is 1, 2 or 3; and more preferable is thecase where R₈₅ is an aliphatic group or an aryl group, R_(d3) is analkenyl group, R_(d4) is a hydrogen atom, or an alkenyl group, and v is2 or 3.

[0286] In the present invention, the compounds represented by formula(TS-VI) are preferably the compounds represented by formula (TS-VIB).

[0287] The compounds represented by formula (TS-VII) are explainedbelow.

[0288] R₉₁ represents an aliphatic or aromatic hydrophobic group havingthe total number of carbon atoms of 10 or more (preferably from 10 to50, more preferably from 10 to 32). Examples of preferable aliphatichydrophobic groups include an alkyl group having 1 to 32 carbon atoms,an alkenyl group having 2 to 32 carbon atoms, an alkynyl group having 2to 32 carbon atoms, a cycloalkyl group having 3 to 32 carbon atoms and acycloalkenyl group having 3 to 32 carbon atoms. The above alkyl group,alkenyl group and alkynyl group each may be straight-chain or branched.

[0289] Further, each of these aliphatic hydrophobic groups may have asubstituent(s).

[0290] Examples of aromatic hydrophobic groups include an aryl group(for example, phenyl) and an aromatic heterocyclic group (for example,pyridyl, furyl). Further, each of these aromatic groups may have asubstituent(s).

[0291] R₉₁ is preferably an alkyl group or an aryl group.

[0292] As the substituent with which the aliphatic or aromatic grouprepresented by R₉₁ may be substituted, there is no particularlimitation, but as a preferable substituent, for example, there areillustrated an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an acyl group, an acyloxygroup, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a carbamoylgroup, a sulfamoyl group, an acylamino group and an amino group. Analiphatic group is more preferred.

[0293] Y₉₁ represents a monovalent organic group containing an alcoholichydroxyl group. Y₉₁ is preferably a monovalent organic group representedby formula [AL] set forth below.

[0294] Formula [AL]

Y₉₂—(L₉₂)m₉₂—

[0295] In the formula, Y₉₂ represents a group from a compound in which ahydrogen atom is removed from at least one of hydroxyl groups in apolyhydric alcohol. L₉₂ represents a divalent linking group. m₉₂ is 0 or1.

[0296] The polyhydric alcohol from which a hydrogen atom is removed toform a group represented by Y₉₂, is preferably glycerol, polyglycerol,pentaerythritol, trimethylolpropane, neopentylglycol, sorbitan, sorbide,sorbitol, sugars, and the like. The divalent linking group representedby L₉₂ is preferably —C(═O)— or —SO₂—.

[0297] Preferable compounds in another embodiment of the compoundsrepresented by formula (TS-VII) are compounds in which R₉₁ represents analiphatic group having carbon atoms of 12 or more (preferably alkyl oralkenyl groups having 12 to 32 carbon atoms) and Y₉₁ represents an OHgroup.

[0298] The metal complex for use in the present invention is explainedbelow.

[0299] The metal complex for use in the present invention, is preferablythose having Cu, Co, Ni, Pd, or Pt as a central metal, and morepreferably those having Ni as a central metal. It is preferable thatthey are low in solubility to water. Specifically, the solubility atroom temperature is preferably 50% or less, more preferably 25% or less,and furthermore preferably 10% or less. The category of a preferablecompound can also be defined in terms of total number of carbon atoms ofthe whole compound. Specifically, the compound has carbon atomspreferably in the range of 15 to 65, more preferably in the range of 20to 60, furthermore preferably in the range of 25 to 55, and mostpreferably in the range of 30 to 50, in total.

[0300] The metal complex for use in the present invention may have anykind of ligand. Dithiolate-series metal complexes andsalicylaldoxime-series metal complexes are preferable, andsalicylaldoxime-series metal complexes are more preferable.

[0301] As the metal complex for use in the present invention, there aremany known metal complexes, including dithiolate-series nickel complexesand salicylaldoxime-series nickel complexes, which are effective.Preferable examples include compounds represented, for example, by,formula (I) of JP-B-61-13736, formula (I) of JP-B-61-13737, formula (I)of JP-B-61-13738, formula (I) of JP-B-61-13739, formula (I) ofJP-B-61-13740, formula (I) of JP-B-61-13742, formula (I) ofJP-B-61-13743, formula (I) of JP-B-61-13744, formula of JP-B-5-69212,formula (I) or (II) of JP-B-5-88809, formula of JP-A-63-199248, formula(I) or (II) of JP-A-64-75568, formula (I) or (II) of JP-A-3-182749,formula (II), (III), (IV) or (V) of U.S. Pat. No. 4,590,153, or formula(II), (III), or (IV) of U.S. Pat. No. 4,912,027.

[0302] As the metal complex that can be used in the present invention,the compound represented by formula (TS-VIIIA) is preferable.

[0303] In formula (TS-VIIIA), R₁₀₁, R₁₀₂, R₁₀₃, and R₁₀₄ eachindependently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent (e.g., analiphatic group, an aliphatic oxy group, an aliphatic sulfonyl group, anaryl sulfonyl group, an acyl amino group). R₁₀₅ represents a hydrogenatom, an aliphatic group (e.g., methyl, ethyl, vinyl, undecyl), or anaryl group (e.g., phenyl, naphthyl). R₁₀₆ represents a hydrogen atom, analiphatic group (e.g., methyl, ethyl), an aryl group (e.g., phenyl,4-methylphenyl), or a hydroxyl group. M represents Cu, Co, Ni, Pd, orPt. Two R₁₀₆s may combine together to form a 5- to 7-membered ring. R₁₀₁and R₁₀₂, R₁₀₂ and R₁₀₃, R₁₀₃ and R₁₀₄, and R₁₀₄ and R₁₀₅, each two ofwhich are adjacent to each other, may combine together to form a 5- to6-membered ring.

[0304] In formula (TS-VIIIA), it is preferable in the present inventionthat R₁₀₁, R₁₀₂, R₁₀₃, and R₁₀₄ each independently represent a hydrogenatom, an aliphatic group, or an aliphatic oxy group, R₁₀₅ is a hydrogenatom, R₁₀₆ is a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group, or a hydroxyl group,and M is Ni; and it is more preferable that R₁₀₁, R₁₀₂, R₁₀₃, and R₁₀₄each independently represent a hydrogen atom, or an aliphatic oxy group,R₁₀₅ is a hydrogen atom, R₁₀₆ is a hydroxyl group, and M is Ni.

[0305] An ultraviolet absorbing agent for use in the present inventionis explained below.

[0306] The ultraviolet absorbing agent for use in the present inventionis not particularly limited, so long as the compound has the maximumabsorption wavelength (λmax) at 400 nm or less. The compoundsrepresented by any of formulae (UA), (UB), (UC), (UD) and (UE) arepreferred.

[0307] In the formula (UA), R₂₁ represents a hydrogen atom, a halogenatom, an alkyl group, or an alkoxy group. R₂₂ and R₂₃, which may be thesame or different each other, each independently represent a hydrogenatom, a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group, or a substituted orunsubstituted aryl group.

[0308] Preferably, R₂₁ represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom (forexample, C1, Br), an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms (forexample, methyl, ethyl, butyl), or an alkoxy group having 1 to 4 carbonatoms (for example, methoxy, butoxy). R₂₂ and R₂₃, which may be the sameor different from each other, each represent a hydrogen atom, asubstituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms(for example, methyl, ethyl, sec-butyl, tert-butyl, tert-octyl, dodecyl,carboxyethyl, n-octyloxycarbonylethyl), or a substituted orunsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms (for example,phenyl, p-chlorophenyl, p-methoxyphenyl).

[0309] In the formula (UB), R₂₄, R₂₅ and R₂₆, which may be the same ordifferent from each other, each independently represent a hydrogen atom,an alkoxy group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms (for example, methoxy,ethoxy, dodecyloxy), or a hydroxyl group.

[0310] In the formula (UC), R₂₇ represent a hydroxyl group, an alkoxygroup, or an alkyl group. R₂₈ and R₂₉ each independently represent ahydrogen atom, a hydroxyl group, an alkoxy group, or an alkyl group. R₂₈and R₂₇, or R₂₉ and R₂₇ may adjoin each other to form a 5- or 6-memberedring. Xa and Ya, which may be the same or different from each other,each represent CN, —COR₃₈, —COOR₃₈, —SO₂R₃₈, —CON(R₃₈)(R₃₉), or —COOH.R₃₈ and R₃₉ each independently represent an alkyl group or an arylgroup. R₃₉ may be a hydrogen atom.

[0311] Preferably, R₂₇ represents a hydroxyl group, an alkoxy grouphaving 1 to 6 carbon atoms (for example, methoxy, ethoxy, n-butoxy), oran alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms (for example, methyl, ethyl,t-butyl, iso-propyl). R₂₈ and R₂₉ each represent a hydrogen atom, ahydroxyl group, an alkoxy group or an alkyl group, in which the alkoxygroup and the alkyl group each have the same meanings as in R₂₇. R₂₈ andR₂₇, or R₂₉ and R₂₇ may adjoin each other to form a 5- or 6-memberedring (for example, methylenedioxy ring). Xa and Ya, which may be thesame or different from each other, each represent —CN, —COR₃₈, —COOR₃₈,—SO₂R₃₈, —CON(R₃₈)(R₃₉), or —COOH. R₃₈ and R₃₉ each represent asubstituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 16 carbon atoms(for example, methyl, ethyl, methoxyethyl, n-hexyl, phenoxyethyl) or asubstituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms (forexample, phenyl, p-chlorophenyl, p-methylphenyl, p-tert-butylphenyl).R₃₉ may be a hydrogen atom.

[0312] In the formula (UD), R₃₀ and R₃₁ each independently represent ahydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, or an aryl group. R₃₀and R₃₁ may be the same or different from each other, but they cannot bea hydrogen atom at the same time. Further, a 5- or 6-membered ring maybe formed by R₃₀ and R₃₁ together with the N. Xa and Ya have the samemeanings as defined in formula (UC).

[0313] Preferably, R₃₀ and R₃₁ each represent a hydrogen atom, asubstituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms(for example, methyl, ethyl, t-butyl, n-dodecyl, methoxyethyl,ethoxyethyl), an alkenyl group having 3 to 6 carbon atoms, or an arylgroup (for example, phenyl, tolyl, p-chlorophenyl, p-methoxyphenyl). R₃₀and R₃₁ may be the same or different from each other, but they can notbe a hydrogen atom at the same time. Further, a 5- or 6-membered ring,e.g. a piperidine ring or a morpholine ring, may be formed by R₃₀ andR₃₁ together with the N. Xa and Ya have the same meanings as mentionedin formula (UC).

[0314] In the formula (UE), R₃₂, R₃₃ and R₃₄ each independentlyrepresent a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group, aryl group,alkoxyl group, aryloxy group, or heterocyclic group, in which at leastone of the above R₃₂, R₃₃ and R₃₄ is represented by formula (UF) setforth below.

[0315] In the formula (UF), R₃₅ and R₃₆ each independently represent ahydrogen atom, a halogen atom, or a substituted or unsubstituted alkylgroup, cycloalkyl group, aryl group, alkoxyl group or aryloxy group.

[0316] Examples of specific compounds of the compound represented by anyone of formulae (TS-I) to (TS-VII), the metal complex, and theultraviolet absorbing agent are set forth below, but the presentinvention is not limited to these compounds.

[0317] Next, water-insoluble and organic solvent-soluble homopolymers orcopolymers that can be used in the present invention are explained indetail below.

[0318] In the present invention, the term “water-insoluble” is used tomean that solubility to water is 0.1% or less. As the water-insolubleand organic solvent-soluble homopolymer or copolymer (hereinafterreferred to as a polymer or copolymer for use in the present invention),various kinds of polymers and copolymers can be used. For example, thoseset forth below can be preferably used.

[0319] (1) Vinyl-Series Polymers and Copolymers

[0320] Monomers that form the vinyl-series polymers and copolymers thatcan be used in the present invention are more specifically set forthbelow.

[0321] There are illustrated, for example:

[0322] Acrylic acid esters: for example, methyl acrylate, ethylacrylate, n-propyl acrylate, isopropyl acrylate, n-butyl acrylate,tert-butyl acrylate, isobutyl acrylate, sec-butyl acrylate, amylacrylate, hexyl acrylate, 2-ethylhexyl acrylate, octyl acrylate,tert-octyl acrylate, 2-chloroethyl acrylate, 2-bromoethyl acrylate,4-chlorobutyl acrylate, cyanoethyl acrylate, 2-acetoxyethyl acrylate,dimethylaminoethyl acrylate, benzyl acrylate, methoxybenzyl acrylate,2-chlorocyclohexyl acrylate, cyclohexyl acrylate, furfuryl acrylate,tetrahydrofurfuryl acrylate, phenyl acrylate, 5-hydroxypentyl acrylate,2,2-dimethyl-3-hydroxylpropyl acrylate, 2-methoxyethyl acrylate,3-methoxybutyl acrylate, 2-ethoxyethyl acrylate, 2-iso-propoxyethylacrylate, 2-butoxyethyl acrylate, 2-(2-methoxyethoxy)ethyl acrylate,2-(2-butoxyethoxy)ethyl acrylate, ω-methoxypolyethyleneglycol acrylate(addition number of moles: n=9), 1-bromo-2-methoxyethyl acrylate,1,1-dichloro-2-ethoxyethyl acrylate;

[0323] Methacrylic acid esters: for example, methyl methacrylate, ethylmethacrylate, n-propyl methacrylate, isopropyl methacrylate, n-butylmethacrylate, tert-butyl methacrylate, isobutyl methacrylate, sec-butylmethacrylate, amyl methacrylate, hexyl methacrylate, cyclohexylmethacrylate, benzyl methacrylate, chlorobenzyl methacrylate, octylmethacrylate, sulfopropyl methacrylate, N-ethyl-N-phenylaminoethylmethacrylate, 2-(3-phenylpropyloxy)ethyl methacrylate,dimethylaminophenoxyethyl methacrylate, furfuryl methacrylate,tetrahydrofurfuryl methacrylate, phenyl methacrylate, cresylmethacrylate, naphthyl methacrylate, 2-hydroxyethyl methacrylate,4-hydroxybutyl methacrylate, triethyleneglycol monomethacrylate,dipropyleneglycol monomethacrylate, 2-methoxyethyl methacrylate,3-methoxybutyl methacrylate, 2-acetoxyethyl methacrylate,2-acetoacetoxyethyl methacrylate, 2-ethoxyethyl methacrylate,2-iso-propoxyethyl methacrylate, 2-butoxyethyl methacrylate,2-(2-methoxyethoxy)ethyl methacrylate, 2-(2-ethoxyethoxy)ethylmethacrylate, 2-(2-butoxyethoxy)ethyl methacrylate,ω-methoxypolyethyleneglycol methacrylate (addition number of moles:n=6);

[0324] Vinyl esters: for example, vinyl acetate, vinyl propionate, vinylbutylate, vinyl isobutylate, vinyl caproate, vinyl chloroacetate, vinylmethoxyacetate, vinyl phenylacetate, vinyl benzoate, vinyl salicylate;

[0325] Acrylamides: for example, acrylamide, methylacrylamide,ethylacrylamide, propylacrylamide, butylacrylamide,tert-butylacrylamide, cyclohexylacrylamide, benzylacrylamide,hydroxymethylacrylamide, methoxyethylacrylamide,dimethylaminoethylacrylamide, phenylacrylamide, dimethylacrylamide,diethylacrylamide, β-cyanoethylacrylamide,N-(2-acetoacetoxyethyl)acrylamide, diacetonacrylamide;

[0326] Methacrylamides: for example, methacrylamide,methylmethacrylamide, ethylmethacrylamide, propylmethacrylamide,butylmethacrylamide, tert-butylmethacrylamide, cyclohexylmethacrylamide,benzylmethacrylamide, hydroxymethylmethacrylamide,methoxyethylmethacrylamide, dimethylaminoethylmethacrylamide,phenylmethacrylamide, dimethylmethacrylamide, diethylmethacrylamide,β-cyanoethylmethacrylamide, N-(2-acetoacetoxyethyl)methacrylamide;

[0327] Olefins: for example, dicyclopentadiene, ethylene, propylene,1-butene, 1-pentene, vinyl chloride, vinylidene chloride, isoprene,chloroprene, butadiene, 2,3-dimethylbutadiene;

[0328] Styrenes: for example, styrene, methyl styrene, dimethyl styrene,trimethyl styrene, ethyl styrene, isopropyl styrene, chloromethylstyrene, methoxystyrene, chlorostyrene, dichlorostyrene, bromostyrene,vinylbenzoate methyl ester;

[0329] Crotonic acid esters: for example, butyl crotonate, hexylcrotonate;

[0330] Itaconic acid diesters: for example, dimethyl itaconate, diethylitaconate, dibutyl itaconate;

[0331] Maleic acid diesters: for example, diethyl maleate, dimethylmaleate, dibutyl maleate; and

[0332] Fumaric acid diesters: for example, diethyl fumarate, dimethylfumarate, dibutyl fumarate.

[0333] Examples of other monomers are set forth below.

[0334] There are illustrated, for example:

[0335] Allyl compounds: for example, allyl acetate, allyl caproate,allyl laurate, allyl benzoate;

[0336] Vinyl ethers: for example, methyl vinyl ether, butyl vinyl ether,hexyl vinyl ether, methoxyethyl vinyl ether, dimethylaminoethyl vinylether;

[0337] Vinyl ketones: for example, methyl vinyl ketone, phenyl vinylketone, methoxyethyl vinyl ketone;

[0338] Vinyl heterocyclic compounds: for example, vinyl pyridine,N-vinylimidazole, N-vinyloxazolidone, N-vinyltriazole,N-vinylpyrrolidone;

[0339] Glycidyl esters: for example, glycidyl acrylate, glycidylmethacrylate; and

[0340] Unsaturated nitrites: for example, acrylonitrile,methacrylonitrile.

[0341] The polymer that can be preferably used in the present inventionmay be a homopolymer of any of the above-mentioned monomers, or it maybe a copolymer of at least two kinds of the monomers, if necessary.Further, the polymer for use in the present invention may contain amonomer component having an acid group in such a proportion that theacid group does not render the polymer water-soluble. The proportion ofthe monomer component having an acid group is preferably 20% or less. Itis preferred that the polymer for use in the present invention containsnone of the monomer component having an acid group. However, the presentinvention is not limited to the above so long as the monomer is acompound represented by formula (A) or (B) for use in the presentinvention. Examples of the monomer having an acid group include acrylicacid; methacrylic acid; itaconic acid; maleic acid; monoalkyl itaconate(for example, monomethyl itaconate), monoalkyl maleate (for example,monomethyl maleate), citraconic acid; styrene sulfonic acid;vinylbenzylsulfonic acid; vinylbenzene sulfonic acid; acryloyloxyalkylsulfonic acid (for example, acryloyloxymethyl sulfonic acid);methacryloyloxyalkyl sulfonic acid (for example, methacryloyloxymethylsulfonic acid, methacryloyloxyethyl sulfonic acid, methacryloyloxypropylsulfonic acid); acrylamidoalkyl sulfonic acid (for example,2-acrylamido-2-methylethane sulfonic acid, 2-acrylamido-2-methylpropanesulfonic acid, 2-acrylamido-2-methylbutane sulfonic acid);methacrylamidoalkyl sulfonic acid (for example,2-methacrylamido-2-methylethane sulfonic acid,2-methacrylamido-2-methylpropane sulfonic acid,2-methacrylamido-2-methylbutane sulfonic acid);acryloyloxyalkylphosphate (for example, acryloyloxyethylphosphate,3-acryloyloxypropyl-2-phosphate); and methacryloyloxyalkylphosphate (forexample, methacryloyloxyethylphosphate,3-methacryloyloxypropyl-2-phosphate).

[0342] These monomers having an acid group may be an alkali metal salt(for example, Na, K salts), or an ammonium salt.

[0343] As the monomer that forms the polymer for use in the presentinvention, acrylate-series, methacrylate-series, acrylamido-series andmethacrylamido-series monomers are preferred.

[0344] The polymers formed from the above-mentioned monomers can beobtained according to the processes such as solution polymerization,bulk polymerization, suspension polymerization, and latexpolymerization. As the initiator that can be used for thesepolymerizations, use can be made of a water-soluble polymerizationinitiator and a lipophilic polymerization initiator.

[0345] As the water-soluble polymerization initiator, for example, usecan be made of persulfate salts, such as potassium persulfate, ammoniumpersulfate, and sodium persulfate; water-soluble azo compounds, such assodium 4,4′-azobis-4-cyanovalerate and2,2′-azobis(2-amidinopropane)hydrochloride; and hydrogen peroxide.

[0346] As the lipophilic polymerization initiator, for example, mentioncan be made of lipophilic azo compounds, such as azobisisobutyronitrile,2,2′-azobis(2,4-dimethylvaleronitrile),2,2′-azobis(4-methoxy-2,4-dimethylvaleronitrile),1,1′-azobis(cyclohexanone-1-carbonitrile), 2,2′-azobisisobutyric aciddimethyl ester, and 2,2′-azobisisobutyric acid diethyl ester; benzoylperoxide, lauryl peroxide, diisopropylperoxy dicarbonate, anddi-tert-butyl peroxide.

[0347] (2) Polyester Resins Obtained by Condensation of PolyhydricAlcohols and Polybasic Acids

[0348] As the polyhydric alcohol, glycols having the structure set forthbelow or polyalkyleneglycols are useful.

HO—Ra—OH

[0349] In the formula, Ra represents a hydrocarbon (especially analiphatic hydrocarbon) having 2 to about 12 carbon atoms.

[0350] As the polybasic acid, acids having the structure set forth beloware useful.

HOOC—Rb—COOH (Rb represents a single bond or a hydrocarbon having 1 to12 carbon atoms.)

[0351] As specific examples of the polyhydric alcohol, there areillustrated ethylene glycol, diethylene glycol, triethylene glycol,1,2-propylene glycol, 1,3-propylene glycol, trimethylolpropane,1,4-butanediol, isobutylenediol, 1,5-pentanediol, neopentylglycol,1,6-hexanediol, 1,7-heptanediol, 1,8-octanediol, 1,9-nonanediol,1,10-decanediol, 1,11-undecanediol, 1,12-dodecanediol,1,13-tridecanediol, 1,14-tetradecanediol, glycerol, diglycerol,triglycerol, 1-methyl glycerol, erythritol, mannitol, and sorbitol.

[0352] As specific examples of the polybasic acid, there are illustratedoxalic acid, succinic acid, glutaric acid, adipic acid, pimelic acid,cork acid, azelaic acid, sebacic acid, nonanedicarboxylic acid,decanedicarboxylic acid, undecanedicarboxylic acid, dodecanedicarboxylicacid, fumaric acid, maleic acid, itaconic acid, citraconic acid,phthalic acid, isophthalic acid, terephthalic acid, tetrachlorophthalicacid, metaconic acid, isopimelic acid, cyclopentadiene-anhydrous maleicacid adducts, and rosin-anhydrous maleic acid adducts.

[0353] (3) Polyesters Obtained by a Ring-Opening Polymerization Process

[0354] These polyesters can be obtained from β-propiolactone,ε-caprolactone, dimethylpropiolactone or the like.

[0355] (4) Others

[0356] There are illustrated polycarbonate resins obtained bypolycondensation of a glycol or divalent phenol and a carbonate orphosgene; polyurethane resins obtained by polyaddition of polyhydricalcohols and polyisocyanates; and polyamide resins obtained frompolyamines and polybasic acids.

[0357] The number-average molecular weight of the polymer for use in thepresent invention is not particularly limited, but it is preferably200,000 or less, and more preferably in the range of from 800 to100,000.

[0358] Specific examples of the polymer for use in the present inventionare shown below, but the present invention is not limited to thesecompounds. (The composition of a copolymer is indicated by a massratio.)

[0359] P-1) poly(N-sec-butylacrylamide)

[0360] P-2) poly(N-tert-butylacrylamide)

[0361] P-3) diacetoneacrylamide/methyl methacrylate copolymer (25:75)

[0362] P-4) poly(cyclohexyl methacrylate)

[0363] P-5) N-tert-butylacrylamide/methyl methacrylate copolymer (60:40)

[0364] P-6) poly(N,N-dimethylacrylamide)

[0365] P-7) poly(tert-butyl methacrylate)

[0366] P-8) poly(vinyl acetate)

[0367] P-9) poly(vinyl propionate)

[0368] P-10) poly(methyl methacrylate)

[0369] P-11) poly(ethyl methacrylate)

[0370] P-12) poly(ethyl acrylate)

[0371] P-13) vinyl acetate/vinyl alcohol copolymer (90:10)

[0372] P-14) poly(n-butyl acrylate)

[0373] P-15) poly(n-butyl methacrylate)

[0374] P-16) poly(isobutyl methacrylate)

[0375] P-17) poly(isopropyl methacrylate)

[0376] P-18) poly(octyl acrylate)

[0377] P-19) n-butyl acrylate/acrylamide copolymer (95:5)

[0378] P-20) stearyl methacrylate/acrylic acid copolymer (90:10)

[0379] P-21) methyl methacrylate/vinyl chloride copolymer (70:30)

[0380] P-22) methyl methacrylate/styrene copolymer (90:10)

[0381] P-23) methyl methacrylate/ethyl acrylate copolymer (50:50)

[0382] P-24) n-butyl methacrylate/methyl methacrylate/styrene copolymer(50:20:30)

[0383] P-25) vinyl acetate/acrylamide copolymer (85:15)

[0384] P-26) vinyl chloride/vinyl acetate copolymer (65:35)

[0385] P-27) methyl methacrylate/acrylonitrile copolymer (65:35)

[0386] P-28) n-butyl methacrylate/pentylmethacrylate/N-vinyl-2-pyrrolidone copolymer (38:38:24)

[0387] P-29) methyl methacrylate/n-butyl methacrylate/isobutylmethacrylate/acrylic acid copolymer (37:29:25:9)

[0388] P-30) n-butyl methacrylate/acrylic acid copolymer (95:5)

[0389] P-31) methyl methacrylate/acrylic acid copolymer (95:5)

[0390] P-32) benzyl methacrylate/acrylic acid copolymer (93:7)

[0391] P-33) n-butyl methacrylate/methyl methacrylate/benzylmethacrylate/acrylic acid copolymer (35:35:25:5)

[0392] P-34) n-butyl methacrylate/methyl methacrylate/benzylmethacrylate copolymer (40:30:30)

[0393] P-35) diacetoneacrylamide/methyl methacrylate copolymer (50:50)

[0394] P-36) methyl vinyl ketone/isobutyl methacrylate copolymer (55:45)

[0395] P-37) ethyl methacrylate/n-butyl acrylate copolymer (70:30)

[0396] P-38) diacetoneacrylamide/n-butyl acrylate copolymer (60:40)

[0397] P-39) methyl methacrylate/stearylmethacrylate/diacetoneacrylamide copolymer (40:40:20)

[0398] P-40) n-butyl acrylate/stearyl methacrylate/diacetoneacrylamidecopolymer (70:20:10)

[0399] P-41) stearyl methacrylate/methyl methacrylate/acrylic acidcopolymer (50:40:10)

[0400] P-42) methyl methacrylate/styrene/vinylsulfonamide copolymer(70:20:10)

[0401] P-43) methyl methacrylate/phenyl vinyl ketone copolymer (70:30)

[0402] P-44) n-butyl acrylate/methyl methacrylate/n-butyl methacrylatecopolymer (35:35:30)

[0403] P-45) n-butyl methacrylate/N-vinyl-2-pyrrolidone copolymer(90:10)

[0404] P-46) poly(pentyl acrylate)

[0405] P-47) cyclohexyl methacrylate/methyl methacrylate/n-propylmethacrylate copolymer (37:29:34)

[0406] P-48) poly(pentyl methacrylate)

[0407] P-49) methyl methacrylate/n-butyl methacrylate copolymer (65:35)

[0408] P-50) vinyl acetate/vinyl propionate copolymer (75:25)

[0409] P-51) n-butyl methacrylate/sodium 3-acryloxybutane-1-sulfonatecopolymer (97:3)

[0410] P-52) n-butyl methacrylate/methyl methacrylate/acrylamidecopolymer (35:35:30)

[0411] P-53) n-butyl methacrylate/methyl methacrylate/vinyl chloridecopolymer (37:36:27)

[0412] P-54) n-butyl methacrylate/styrene copolymer (82:18)

[0413] P-55) tert-butyl methacrylate/methyl methacrylate copolymer(70:30)

[0414] P-56) poly(N-tert-butylmethacrylamide)

[0415] P-57) N-tert-butylacrylamide/methylphenyl methacrylate copolymer(60:40)

[0416] P-58) methyl methacrylate/acrylonitrile copolymer (70:30)

[0417] P-59) methyl methacrylate/methyl vinyl ketone copolymer (28:72)

[0418] P-60) methyl methacrylate/styrene copolymer (75:25)

[0419] P-61) methyl methacrylate/hexyl methacrylate copolymer (70:30)

[0420] P-62) butyl methacrylate/acrylic acid copolymer (85:15)

[0421] P-63) methyl methacrylate/acrylic acid copolymer (80:20)

[0422] P-64) methyl methacrylate/acrylic acid copolymer (98:2)

[0423] P-65) methyl methacrylate/N-vinyl-2-pyrrolidone copolymer (90:10)

[0424] P-66) n-butyl methacrylate/vinyl chloride copolymer (90:10)

[0425] P-67) n-butyl methacrylate/styrene copolymer (70:30)

[0426] P-68) 1,4-butanediol/adipic acid polyester

[0427] P-69) ethylene glycol/sebacic acid polyester

[0428] P-70) poly(caprolactam)

[0429] P-71) poly(propiolactam)

[0430] P-72) poly(dimethylpropiolactone)

[0431] P-73) N-tert-butylacrylamide/dimethylaminoethylaramide copolymer(85:15)

[0432] P-74) N-tert-butylmethacrylamide/vinylpyridine copolymer (95:5)

[0433] P-75) diethyl maleate/n-butyl acrylate copolymer (65:35)

[0434] P-76) N-tert-butylacrylamide/2-methoxyethyl acrylate copolymer(55:45)

[0435] The polymer of still another preferable mode that can bepreferably used in the present invention, is a polymer substantiallyinsoluble in water, which comprises as a constituent element thereof amonomer unit having at least one kind of aromatic group, and which has anumber average molecular weight of less than 2,000. The number averagemolecular weight is preferably 200 or more but less than 2,000, and morepreferably 200 or more but 1,000 or less. The polymer that can be usedin the present invention may be a so-called homopolymer composed of onekind of monomer unit, or a copolymer composed of two kinds or more ofmonomer units. In the case of a copolymer, it preferably comprises themonomer unit having the aromatic group, according to the presentinvention in a proportion of 20% or more of the mass composition of thecopolymer. The polymer structure is not particularly limited in so faras the above-mentioned condition is fulfilled. Examples of the polymerhaving the preferred polymer structure include a polymer whoseconstituent element is styrene, α-methylstyrene, β-methylstyrene, or amonomer having a substituent on the benzene ring of such a monomer; apolymer whose constituent element is an aromatic acrylamide, an aromaticmethacrylamide, an aromatic acrylic ester, or an aromatic methacrylicester. Examples of the aromatic group include a phenyl group, a naphthylgroup, a benzyl group, a biphenyl group, and the like. These aromaticgroups may have a substituent(s) such as an alkyl group, a halogen atom,and the like. In the case of a copolymer, comonomers listed, forexample, in JP-A-63-264748 can be used preferably. From the viewpointsof availability of raw materials and aging characteristics of anemulsion, a polymer derived from styrene, α-methylstyrene orβ-methylstyrene is preferable.

[0436] In the present invention, among the compound represented by anyone of formulae (TS-I) to (TS-VII), the metal complex, the ultravioletabsorbing agent, and the water-insoluble homopolymer or copolymer, it ispreferred to use at least one selected from the compound represented byany of formulae (TS-I), (TS-II), (TS-VI), (TS-V), (TS-VI), or (TS-VII),the ultraviolet absorbing agent, and the water-insoluble homopolymer orcopolymer; and more preferred to use at least one selected from thecompound represented by formula (TS-I), (TS-II), (TS-V), (TS-VI) or(TS-VII), the ultraviolet absorbing agent, and the water-insolublehomopolymer or copolymer.

[0437] The compound represented by any one of formulae (TS-I) to(TS-VII), the metal complex, the ultraviolet absorbing agent, or thewater-insoluble homopolymer or copolymer, each of which can be used inthe present invention, each may be used singly or in combination withtwo or more kinds thereof. These additives may be added to the samelayer as the layer containing the dye-forming coupler represented byformula (I), or to a separate layer from the layer containing thedye-forming coupler, with the former being preferred.

[0438] An addition amount of the compound represented by any one offormulae (TS-I) to (TS-VII), the metal complex, the ultravioletabsorbing agent, or the water-insoluble homopolymer or copolymer ispreferably in the range of from 1 to 400 mass %, more preferably in therange of from 10 to 300 mass %, and most preferably in the range of from15 to 200 mass %, to the dye-forming coupler represented by formula (I).

[0439] The above-described alkenylcarbonyl-series compound for use inthe present invention, may be used in combination with other compoundsthan those described above. Examples of the compound that may be used incombination with the above alkenylcarbonyl-series compound, includeboron compounds represented by formula (I) described in JP-A-4-174430,epoxy compounds represented by formula (II) described in U.S. Pat. No.5,183,731 or formula (S1) described in JP-A-8-53431, disulfide-seriescompounds represented by formula described in European PatentPublication EP271,322 B1 or formula (I), (II), (III) or (IV) describedin JP-A-4-19736, reactive compounds represented by formula (I), (II),(III) or (IV) described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,242,785, cyclic phosphorouscompounds represented by formula (1) described in JP-A-8-283279,alcoholic compounds represented by formula (SO) described inJP-A-7-84350, formula (G) described in JP-A-9-114061, formula (II)described in JP-A-9-146242, formula (A) described in JP-A-9-329876, orformula (VII) described in JP-A-62-175748. If the above-mentionedpublications include exemplified compounds that are embraced in any offormulae (TS-I) to (TS-VII) that can be used in the present invention,these compounds are also included in the exemplified compounds that canbe used in the present invention.

[0440] The dye-forming coupler represented by formula (I), theabove-described alkenylcarbonyl-sereis compound, the compoundrepresented by formula (Ph), the compound represented by any one offormulae (E-1) to (E-3), the compound represented by any one of formulae(TS-I) to (TS-VII), the metal complex, the ultraviolet absorbing agent,the water-insoluble homopolymer or copolymer, and the like additives foruse in the present invention, may be introduced into the photosensitivematerial, according to any of dispersion methods. It is preferable touse a water-in-oil dispersion method in which such a compound oradditive is dissolved in a high-boiling organic solvent (optionally incombination with a low-boiling organic solvent), and the solution isemulsified and dispersed in an aqueous gelatin solution, and then it isadded to a silver halide emulsion. Further, it is preferable to use themetal complex for use in the present invention with dispersing it with ahigh-boiling organic solvent.

[0441] Examples of the high-boiling organic solvent that can be used ina water-in-oil dispersion method are described, for example, in U.S.Pat. No. 2,322,027. Further, specific examples of a latex dispersionmethod as one of polymer dispersion methods are described, for example,in U.S. Pat. No. 4,199,363, West German Patent (OLS) No. 2,541,274,JP-B-53-41091, European Patent Publication EP0,727,703 A1, andEP0,727,704 A1. Further, a dispersion method using a polymer that issoluble in an organic solvent is described in PCT InternationalPublication WO88/723.

[0442] Examples of the high-boiling organic solvent that can be used ina water-in-oil dispersion method include phthalic acid esters (e.g.,dibutyl phthalate, dioctyl phthalate, di-2-ethylhexyl phthalate), estersof phosphoric acid or phosphonic acid (e.g., triphenyl phosphate,tricresyl phosphate, tri-2-ethylhexyl phosphate), fatty acid esters(e.g., di-2-ethylhexyl succinate, tributyl citrate), benzoic esters(e.g., 2-ethylhexyl benzoate, dodecyl benzoate), amides (e.g.,N,N-diethyldodecane amide, N,N-dimethylolein amide), alcohols or phenols(e.g., iso-stearyl alcohol, 2,4-di-tert-amyl phenol), anilines (e.g.,N,N-dibutyl-2-butoxy-5-tert-octylaniline), chlorinated paraffins,hydrocarbons (e.g., dodecyl benzene, diisopropyl naphthalene), andcarboxylic acids (e.g., 2-(2,4-di-tert-amyl phenoxy)butyric acid).Further, the high-boiling point organic solvent may be used incombination with an auxiliary solvent, which is an organic solventhaving a boiling point of 30° C. or more and 160° C. or less, such asethyl acetate, butyl acetate, methyl ethyl ketone, cyclohexanone,methylcellosolve acetate, and dimethylformamide. The high-boilingorganic solvent is preferably used in an amount of 0 to 10 times (morepreferably 0 to 4 times) that of a dye-forming coupler, in terms of massratio.

[0443] In order to emulsify and disperse the dye-forming coupler for usein the present invention and the compound for use in the presentinvention in a hydrophilic protective colloid to make lipophilic fineparticles, dispersion is carried out using a dispersant such as asurface active agent, by means of a stirrer including a stirrer(agitator), a homogenizer, a colloid mill, a flow-jet mixer (mill), aultrasonic wave apparatus, and the like.

[0444] All or a part of the auxiliary solvent may be removed from anemulsified dispersion by means of a vacuum distillation, a noodlewashing, an ultrafiltration, or the like, as occasion demands, for thepurpose of improving aging characteristics during storage in the stateof the emulsified dispersion, or inhibiting fluctuation in photographicproperties or improving aging characteristic of the final coatingcomposition in which the emulsified dispersion is mixed with a silverhalide emulsion.

[0445] The average particle size of the oleophilic fine particledispersion thus obtained is preferably in the range of 0.04 to 0.50 μm,more preferably in the range of 0.05 to 0.30 μm, and most preferably inthe range of 0.08 to 0.20 μm. The average particle size can bedetermined with a measuring device such as Coulter submicron particleanalyzer model N4 (trade name, manufactured by Coulter Electronics Co.,Ltd.).

[0446] The silver halide color photographic photosensitive material ofthe present invention, which may be referred to simply as “thephotosensitive material” hereinafter, is explained in detail below.

[0447] The silver halide color photographic photosensitive material ofthe present invention is preferably a silver halide color photographicphotosensitive material which has, on a support, at least one silverhalide emulsion layer containing a yellow dye-forming coupler, at leastone silver halide emulsion layer containing a magenta dye-formingcoupler, and at least one silver halide emulsion layer containing a cyandye-forming coupler.

[0448] In the present invention, the above-said silver halide emulsionlayer containing a yellow dye-forming coupler functions as a yellowcolor-forming layer, the above-said silver halide emulsion layercontaining a magenta dye-forming coupler functions as a magentacolor-forming layer, and the above-said silver halide emulsion layercontaining a cyan dye-forming coupler functions as a cyan color-forminglayer. The silver halide emulsions contained in the yellow color-forminglayer, the magenta color-forming layer, and the cyan color-forming layermay preferably have photosensitivities to mutually different wavelengthregions (such as light in a blue region, light in a green region, andlight in a red region).

[0449] The photosensitive material of the present invention may, ifnecessary, have a hydrophilic colloid layer, an antihalation layer, anintermediate layer, and a colored layer as described below, in additionto the above-said yellow color-forming layer, magenta color-forminglayer, and cyan color-forming layer.

[0450] The silver halide photographic photosensitive material of thepresent invention can be used for various materials, such as colornegative films, color positive films, color reversal films, colorreversal papers, color papers, motion-picture color negatives,motion-picture color positives, display photosensitive materials, andcolor proof (especially, digital color proof) photosensitive materials.

[0451] The present invention is preferably applied to a photosensitivematerial that is used for direct view or appliciation, such as a colorphotographic printing paper (color paper), a display photosensitivematerial, a color proof, a color reversal film (color reversal), a colorreversal paper, and a motion picture color positive. Of thesephotosensitive materials, a color paper and a color reversal film arepreferred.

[0452] In the case where the present invention is applied to a colorpaper, for example, the photosensitive materials described inJP-A-11-7109 are preferred. Particularly the description of theparagraph Nos. 0071 to 0087 in the JP-A-11-7109 is herein incorporatedby reference.

[0453] In the case where the present invention is applied to a colornegative film, the description of the paragraph Nos. 0115 to 0217 inJP-A-11-305396 is preferably applied, and the description is hereinincorporated by reference.

[0454] In the case where the present invention is applied to a colorreversal film, the photosensitive materials described inJP-A-2001-142181 are preferred. Specifically, the description of theparagraph Nos. 0164 to 0188 in the JP-A-2001-142181 and the descriptionof the paragraph Nos. 0018 to 0021 in JP-A-11-84601 are preferablyapplied, and these descriptions are herein incorporated by reference.

[0455] The preferred silver halide photosensitive materials according tothe present invention are explained in detail below.

[0456] Silver halide grains in the silver halide emulsion which can beused in the present invention, are preferably cubic or tetradecahedralcrystal grains substantially having {100} planes (these grains may berounded at the apexes thereof and further may have planes of higherorder), or octahedral crystal grains. Alternatively, a silver halideemulsion in which the proportion of tabular grains having an aspectratio of 2 or more and composed of {100} or {111} planes accounts for50% or more in terms of the total projected area, can also be preferablyused. The term “aspect ratio” refers to the value obtained by dividingthe diameter of the circle having an area equivalent to the projectedarea of an individual grain by the thickness of the grain. In thepresent invention, cubic grains, or tabular grains having {100} planesas major faces, or tabular grains having {111} planes as major faces arepreferably used.

[0457] As a silver halide emulsion which can be used in the presentinvention, for example, silver chloride, silver bromide, silveriodobromide, or silver chloro(iodo)bromide emulsions may be used. It ispreferable for enhancement of processing speed to use a silver chloride,silver chlorobromide, silver chloroiodide, or silver chlorobromoiodideemulsion having a silver chloride content of 90 mol % or greater, morepreferably the silver chloride, silver chlorobromide, silverchloroiodide, or silver chlorobromoiodide emulsion having a silverchloride content of 98 mol % or greater. Preferred of these silverhalide emulsions are those having in the shell parts of silver halidegrains a silver iodochloride phase of 0.01 to 0.50 mol %, morepreferably 0.05 to 0.40 mol %, per mol of the total silver, in view ofhigh sensitivity and excellent high illumination intensity exposuresuitability. Further, especially preferred of these silver halideemulsions are those containing silver halide grains having on thesurface thereof a silver bromide localized phase of 0.2 to 5 mol %, morepreferably 0.5 to 3 mol %, per mol of the total silver, since both highsensitivity and stabilization of photographic properties are attained.

[0458] The silver halide emulsion for use in the present inventionpreferably contains silver iodide. In order to introduce iodide ions, aniodide salt solution may be added alone, or it may be added incombination with both a silver salt solution and a high chloride saltsolution. In the latter case, the iodide salt solution and the highchloride salt solution may be added separately or as a mixture solutionof these salts of iodide and high chloride. The iodide salt is generallyadded in the form of a soluble salt, such as alkali or alkali earthiodide salt. Alternatively, the iodide salt may be introduced bycleaving the iodide ions from an organic molecule, as described in U.S.Pat. No. 5,389,508. As another source of the iodide ion, fine silveriodide grains may be used.

[0459] The addition of an iodide salt solution may be concentrated atone time of grain formation process or may be performed over a certainperiod of time. For obtaining an emulsion with high sensitivity and lowfog, the position of the introduction of an iodide ion to a high silverchloride emulsion is restricted. The deeper in the emulsion grain theiodide ion is introduced, the smaller is the increment of sensitivity.Accordingly, the addition of an iodide salt solution is preferablystarted at 50% or outer side of the volume of a grain, more preferably70% or outer side, and most preferably 80% or outer side. Moreover, theaddition of an iodide salt solution is preferably finished at 98% orinner side of the volume of a grain, most preferably 96% or inner side.When the addition of an iodide salt solution is finished at a littleinner side of the grain surface, thereby an emulsion having highersensitivity and lower fog can be obtained.

[0460] The distribution of an iodide ion concentration in the depthdirection of a grain can be measured according to an etching/TOF-SIMS(Time of Flight-Secondary Ion Mass Spectrometry) method by means of, forexample, a TRIFT II Model TOF-SIMS apparatus (trade name, manufacturedby Phi Evans Co.). A TOF-SIMS method is specifically described in NipponHyomen Kagakukai edited, Hyomen Bunseki Gijutsu Sensho Niji IonShitsuryo Bunsekiho (Surface Analysis Technique Selection-Secondary IonMass Spectrometry), Maruzen Co., Ltd. (1999). When an emulsion grain isanalyzed by the etching/TOF-SIMS method, it can be analyzed that iodideions ooze toward the surface of the grain, even though the addition ofan iodide salt solution is finished at an inner side of the grain. Whenthe silver halide emulsion for use in the present invention containssilver iodide, it is preferred that the emulsion has the maximumconcentration of iodide ions at the surface of the grain, and the iodideion concentration decreases inwardly in the grain, in analysis by theetching/TOF-SIMS method.

[0461] The silver halide emulsion grains to be used in thephotosensitive material of the present invention preferably have asilver bromide localized phase.

[0462] When the silver halide emulsion for use in the present inventioncontains a silver bromide localized phase, the silver bromide localizedphase is preferably formed by epitaxial growth of the localized phasehaving a silver bromide content of at least 10 mol % or more on thegrain surface. In addition, the emulsion grains preferably have theoutermost shell portion having a silver bromide content of 1 mol % ormore in the vicinity of the surface of the grains.

[0463] The silver bromide content of the silver bromide localized phaseis preferably in the range of 1 to 80 mol %, and most preferably in therange of 5 to 70 mol %. The silver bromide localized phase is preferablycomposed of silver having population of 0.1 to 30 mol %, more preferably0.3 to 20 mol %, to the molar amount of entire silver which constitutessilver halide grains for use in the present invention. The silverbromide localized phase is preferably contained (doped) with complexions of a metal of the Group VIII, such as iridium ions. The amount ofthese compounds to be contained can be varied in a wide range dependingon the purposes, and it is preferably in the range of 1×10⁻⁹ to 1×10⁻²mol per mol of silver halide.

[0464] In the present invention, ions of a metal ion, for example, atransition metal, are preferably added in the course of grain formationand/or growth of the silver halide grains, to include the metal ions inthe inside and/or on the surface of the silver halide grains. The metalions to be used are preferably ions of a transition metal. Preferableexamples of the transition metal are iron, ruthenium, iridium, osmium,lead, cadmium or zinc. Further, 6-coordinated octahedral complex saltsof these metal ions which have ligands are more preferably used. Theligand to be used may be an inorganic compound. When employing aninorganic compound as a ligand, cyanide ion, halide ion, thiocyanato,hydroxide ion, peroxide ion, azide ion, nitrite ion, water, ammonia,nitrosyl ion, or thionitrosyl ion is preferably used. Such a ligand ispreferably coordinated to any metal ion selected from theabove-mentioned iron, ruthenium, iridium, osmium, lead, cadmium andzinc. Two or more kinds of these ligands are also preferably used in onecomplex molecule.

[0465] Among them, the silver halide emulsion for use in the presentinvention particularly preferably contains an iridium ion having atleast one organic ligand for the purpose of improving high-intensityreciprocity law failure.

[0466] It is common in the case of other transition metal, when anorganic compound is used as a ligand, preferable examples of the organiccompound include chain compounds having a main chain of 5 or less carbonatoms and/or heterocyclic compounds of 5- or 6-membered ring. Morepreferable examples of the organic compound are those having at least anitrogen, phosphorus, oxygen, or sulfur atom in a molecule as an atomwhich is capable of coordinating to a metal. Most preferred organiccompounds are furan, thiophene, oxazole, isooxazole, thiazole,isothiazole, imidazole, pyrazole, triazole, furazane, pyran, pyridine,pyridazine, pyrimidine and pyrazine. Further, organic compounds whichhave a substituent introduced into a basic skeleton of theabove-mentioned compounds are also preferred.

[0467] Among these compounds, 5-methylthiazole among thiazole ligands isparticularly preferably used as the ligand preferable for the iridiumion.

[0468] Preferable combinations of a metal ion and a ligand are those ofiron and/or ruthenium ion and cyanide ion. Preferred of these compoundsare those in which the number of cyanide ions accounts for the majorityof the coordination sites (number) intrinsic to the iron or rutheniumthat is the central metal. The remaining coordination sites arepreferably occupied by thiocyan, ammonia, water, nitrosyl ion,dimethylsulfoxide, pyridine, pyrazine, or 4,4′-bipyridine. Mostpreferably each of 6 coordination sites of the central metal is occupiedby a cyanide ion, to form a hexacyano iron complex or a hexacyanoruthenium complex. These metal complexes having cyanide ion ligands arepreferably added, during grain formation, in an amount of 1×10⁻⁸ mol to1×10⁻² mol, most preferably 1×10⁻⁶ mol to 5×10⁻⁴ mol, per mol of silver.

[0469] In case of the iridium complex, preferable ligands are fluoride,chloride, bromide and iodide ions, not only the organic ligands. Amongthese ligands, chloride and bromide ions are more preferably used.Specifically, preferable examples of the iridium complex include thefollowing compounds, in addition to those that have the above organicligands: [IrCl₆]³⁻, [IrCl₆]²⁻, [IrCl₅(H₂O)]²⁻, [IrCl₅(H₂O)]⁻,[IrCl₄(H₂O)₂]⁻, [IrCl₄(H₂O)₂]⁰, [IrCl₃(H₂O)₃]⁰, [IrCl₃(H₂O)₃]⁺,[IrBr₆]³⁻, [IrBr₆]²⁻, [IrBr₅(H₂O)]²⁻, [IrBr₅(H₂O)]⁻, [IrBr₄(H₂O)₂]⁻,[IrBr₄(H₂O)₂]⁰, [IrBr₃(H₂O)₃]⁰, and [IrBr₃(H₂O)₃]⁺.

[0470] These iridium complexes are preferably added during grainformation in an amount of 1×10⁻¹⁰ mol to 1×10⁻³ mol, most preferably1×10⁻⁸ mol to 1×10⁻⁵ mol, per mol of silver. In case of the rutheniumcomplex and the osmium complex, nitrosyl ion, thionitrosyl ion, or watermolecule, and chloride ion are preferably used as ligands. Morepreferably these ligands form a pentachloronitrosyl complex, apentachlorothionitrosyl complex, or a pentachloroaquo complex. Theformation of a hexachloro complex is also preferred. These complexes arepreferably added during grain formation in an amount of 1×10⁻¹⁰ mol to1×10⁻⁶ mol, more preferably 1×10⁻⁹ mol to 1×10⁻⁶ mol, per mol of silver.

[0471] In the present invention, the above-mentioned complexes arepreferably added directly to the reaction solution at the time of silverhalide grain formation, or indirectly to the grain-forming reactionsolution via addition to an aqueous halide solution for forming silverhalide grains or other solutions, so that they are incorporated to theinside of the silver halide grains. Further, these methods may becombined, to incorporate the complex into the inside of the silverhalide grains.

[0472] In case where these complexes are incorporated to the inside ofthe silver halide grains, they are preferably uniformly distributed inthe inside of the grains. On the other hand, as disclosed inJP-A-4-208936, JP-A-2-125245 and JP-A-3-188437, they are also preferablydistributed only in the grain surface layer. Alternatively they are alsopreferably distributed only in the inside of the grain while the grainsurface is covered with a layer free from the complex. Further, asdisclosed in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,252,451 and 5,256,530, it is alsopreferred that the silver halide grains are subjected to physicalripening in the presence of fine grains having complexes incorporatedtherein to modify the grain surface phase. Further, these methods may beused in combination. Two or more kinds of complexes may be incorporatedin the inside of an individual silver halide grain. The halogencomposition at the position (portion) where the complexes areincorporated, is not particularly limited, but they are preferablyincorporated in any of a silver chloride layer (phase), a silverchlorobromide layer (phase), a silver bromide layer (phase), a silveriodochloride layer (phase) and a silver iodobromide layer (phase).

[0473] The silver halide grains contained in the silver halide emulsionfor use in the present invention have an average grain size (the grainsize herein means the diameter of the circle equivalent to the projectedarea of the grain, and the number average is taken as the average grainsize) of preferably from 0.01 μm to 2 μm.

[0474] With respect to the distribution of sizes of these grains, socalled monodisperse emulsion having a variation coefficient (the valueobtained by dividing the standard deviation of the grain sizedistribution by the average grain size) of 20% or less, more preferably15% or less, and further preferably 10% or less, is preferred. Forobtaining a wide latitude, it is also preferred to blend theabove-described monodisperse emulsions in the same layer or to form amultilayer structure using the monodisperse emulsions.

[0475] Various compounds or precursors thereof can be included in thesilver halide emulsion for use in the present invention to preventfogging from occurring or to stabilize photographic performance, duringmanufacture, storage or photographic processing of the photosensitivematerial. Specific examples of compounds useful for the above purposesare disclosed in JP-A-62-215272, pages 39 to 72, and they can bepreferably used. In addition, 5-arylamino-1,2,3,4-thiatriazole compounds(the aryl residual group has at least one electron-attractive group)disclosed in European Patent No. 0447647 can also be preferably used.

[0476] In the present invention, a total amount of coated silver of theentire photographic constitutional layers is preferably 0.5 g/m² or less(preferably in the range of 0.2 g/m² to 0.5 g/m²), more preferably 0.45g/m² or less (preferably in the range of 0.2 g/m² to 0.45 g/m²), andmost preferably 0.4 g/m² or less (preferably in the range of 0.2 g/m² to0.4 g/m²).

[0477] Further, in the present invention, in view of effects on restrainof a photosensitive material from fogging, it is preferable that acompound having a recurring unit represented by formula (X) shown belowis incorporated in the photosensitive material.

[0478] In formula (X), R₇ represents —OR, —SR or —N—R(—R′). R and R′each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group that may besubstituted (preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms, morepreferably an unsubstituted alkyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, asulfoalkyl group or a salt thereof, a carboxyalkyl group or a saltthereof), an aryl group that may be substituted (preferably an arylgroup having 6 to 12 carbon atoms, more preferably an unsubstituted arylgroup, or an aryl group substituted with a substituent selected from asulfo group or a salt thereof, a carboxyl group or a salt thereof, analkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group having 1 to 4carbon atoms, or a halogen atom), an aralkyl group that may besubstituted, a cycloalkyl group that may be substituted, or aheterocyclic group that may be substituted. In addition, R and R′ maybond to each other, to form a saturated carbon ring, or a hetero ringcomposed of an (—O—)-containing alkylene group.

[0479] R₈ and R₉ each independently represent a hydrogen atom, or analkyl group that may be substituted (preferably an alkyl group having 1to 4 carbon atoms, more preferably an unsubstituted alkyl group, or analkyl group substituted with a substituent, such as a hydroxyl group, asulfo group or a salt thereof, a carboxyl group or a salt thereof).

[0480] Y₁ and Y₂ each independently represent a polymethylene group thatmay be substituted (preferably a polymethine group having 2 to 12 carbonatoms, more preferably an unsubstituted polymethine group, apolymethylene group substituted with an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbonatoms), an arylene group that may be substituted (preferably an arylenegroup having 6 to 12 carbon atoms, more preferably an unsubstitutedarylene group, or an arylene group substituted with a substituentselected from a sulfo group or a salt thereof, a carboxyl group or asalt thereof, an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, or a halogenatom), or a cycloalkylene group that may be substituted (preferably acycloalkylene group having 3 to 12 carbon atoms). Z represents —O—,—SO₂—, or —CH₂—. p represents 0 or 1.

[0481] Each of the aforementioned groups in formula (X) is not necessaryto be identical in each recurring unit, and further there is noparticular restriction in regularity of sequence with respect to therecurring units. It is also preferable to use a compound containing byturns two kinds of diamine components, as described as specific examplesof formula (I) in JP-B-4-32375.

[0482] The compound having a recurring unit represented by theaforementioned formula (X) is a compound containing a 1,3,5-triazinering. The number of said recurring unit is preferably 2 or more. Bothends of the recurring units may bond to each other to form a ring. Thecompound having a recurring unit represented by formula (X) is explainedfrom the aspect of a preparation method (synthesis method) of thecompound.

[0483] A preparation method of the above compound is outlined below. Thecompound having a recurring unit represented by formula (X) can beobtained by a polymerization reaction between a 1,3,5-triazine compoundrepresented by formula (XA) described below and a diamino compoundrepresented by formula (XB) described below, or alternatively by apolymerization condensation reaction between abis(halogeno-1,3,5-triazine) compound represented by formula (XC)described below and a diamino compound represented by formula (XB)described above.

[0484] In formula (XA), X₂₁ represents a halogen atom (e.g., chlorine,bromine). R₇ has the same meaning as that described in theaforementioned formula (X), with a preferable range being identicalthereto.

[0485] Formula (XB)

H(R₈—)N—(Y₁—Z)_(p)—Y₂—N(—R₉)H

[0486] In formula (XB), R₈, R₉, Y₁, Y₂, Z and p each have the samemeanings as in the aforementioned formula (X), with preferable rangesbeing identical thereto.

[0487] In formula (XC), X₂₁ has the same meaning as that described inthe aforementioned formula (XA); and R₇, R₈, R₉, Y₁, Y₂, Z and p eachhave the same meanings as those in the aforementioned formula (X), withpreferable ranges being identical thereto.

[0488] Halogeno-1,3,5-triazine compounds represented by theaforementioned formula (XA) or (XC) can be prepared according to, forexample, the method of using cyanuric chloride as a starting material,as described in Journal of the American Chemical Society, Vol. 73, pp.2981 to 2992 (1951).

[0489] The compounds having a recurring unit represented by formula (X)are explained in more detail below.

[0490] Examples of R₇ in the aforementioned formula (X), and in formula(XA) or (XC) that represents a starting material, include the followinggroups.

[0491] —OH, —OCH₃, —OC₂H₅, —OC₄H₉, —SCH₃, —SC₂H₅, —NH₂, —NHCH₃, —NHC₂H₅,—NHC₄H₉, —N(CH₃)₂, —NHC₁₂H₂₅, —NHCH₂CH₂OH, —NHCH₂CH₂CH₂OH,—N(CH₂CH₂OH)₂, —NHCH₂CH₂—SO₃Na, —NHCH₂CH₂—SO₃H, —NHCH₂—COOH

[0492] Examples of the group —N(R₈)—(Y₁—)p—Y₂—N(R₉)— in theaforementioned formula (X) that represents the compound that ispreferably used in the present invention, and in the aforementionedformulae (XB) and (XC) that each represent a starting material or areagent for a polycondensation reaction, include the following groups.

[0493] —NH(CH₂)₂—NH—, —HN(CH₂)₃—NH—, —HN(CH₂)₄—NH—, —HN(CH₂)₆—NH—,—HN(CH₂)₁₂—NH—, —HNCH₂CH₂—O—CH₂CH₂NH—,

[0494] Specifically describing a method of preparing the compoundcontaining a recurring unit represented by the aforementioned formula(X) in the molecule, there are two general methods of the following (a)and (b):

[0495] (a): A method of reacting 1 mole of a dihalogeno-1,3,5-triazinecompound represented by the aforementioned formula (XA) with about 1mole of a diamino compound represented by the aforementioned formula(XB) in a proper solvent (preferably water, acetone, dioxane,dimethylformamide, diethylformamide, etc.) in the presence or theabsence of a proper deoxidizing agent (preferably inorganic bases suchas alkali acid carbonate, alkali carbonate and caustic alkali, andorganic bases such as pyridine, 2,4,6-trimethylpyridine anddiaminobicyclooctane) at a proper temperature (preferably in the rangeof from 10 to 150° C.); and

[0496] (b): A method of reacting 1 mole of abis(halogeno-1,3,5-triazine) compound represented by the aforementionedformula (XC) with about 1 mole of a diamino compound represented by theaforementioned formula (XB) at a proper temperature (preferably in therange of from 30 to 150° C.) using the same deoxidizing agent asdescribed in (a).

[0497] The compounds containing a recurring unit represented by theaforementioned formula (X) may be those prepared by any of generalmethods of the aforementioned (a) and (b), or those obtained by othermethods.

[0498] Specific examples of the compound containing a recurring unitrepresented by the aforementioned formula (X) are shown below. Thenumber of the recurring unit is preferably 2 or more, more preferably inthe range of from 2 to 20.

[0499] In the case where the compound containing a recurring unitrepresented by the aforementioned formula (X) is a chain polymer, saidpolymer has two end groups of X₁₁ and X₁₂. It is assumed that X₁₁ isusually a halogen atom that is represented by X₂₁ in the aforementionedformula (XA), or a hydroxyl group, and that X₁₂ is a hydrogen atom or agroup represented by said formula (XA) except for one X₂₁ being omitted(another X₂₁ is a halogen atom or a hydroxyl group like the above X₁₁).The compound containing a recurring unit represented by theaforementioned formula (X) may have a certain distribution as to thenumber of recurring units containing a 1,3,5-triazine ring, or maycontain impurities having a substituent bonded at an unintended siteintroduced during synthesis process (for example, those in which theaforementioned end group X₁₁ is the same group as R₇).

[0500] A photosensitive material can contain the compound having arecurring (repeating) unit represented by the formula (X), by theaddition and mixing of the compound at any time point in the process ofpreparing the photosensitive material (for example, at the step ofpreparing a silver halide emulsion, or at the step of preparing acoating solution of the photosensitive material). In addition, any of anon-photosensitive layer and a photosensitive silver halide emulsionlayer can contain the compound having a recurring unit represented byformula (X). Preferably, the said compound is contained in aphotosensitive silver halide emulsion layer. In one preferable mode, thesaid compound is contained in a blue-light-sensitive silver halideemulsion layer. Further, the said compound may also be contained in twoor more light-sensitive silver halide emulsion layers. The content ofthe said compound in the photosensitive material varies depending on itspurposes, but generally it is preferably 0.001 mg to 100 mg, morepreferably 0.01 mg to 20 mg, still more preferably 0.05 mg to 10 mg, perm² of the light-sensitive material. Further, when containing the saidcompound in a silver halide emulsion layer, the amount to be added ofthe compound having a repeating unit represented by formula (X) ispreferably 1 mg to 10 g, more preferably 5 mg to 5 g, and furtherpreferably 10 mg to 2 g, per mol of the silver halide in the said layer.

[0501] Further, in order to enhance storability (storage stability) ofthe silver halide emulsion for use in the present invention, it is alsopreferred in the present invention to use hydroxamic acid derivativesdescribed in JP-A-11-109576; cyclic ketones having a double bondadjacent to a carbonyl group, both ends of the double bond beingsubstituted with an amino group or a hydroxyl group, as described inJP-A-11-327094 (particularly compounds represented by formula (S1); thedescription at paragraph Nos. 0036 to 0071 of JP-A-11-327094 isincorporated herein by reference); sulfo-substituted catecols andhydroquinones described in JP-A-11-143011 (for example,4,5-dihydroxy-1,3-benzenedisulfonic acid,2,5-dihydroxy-1,4-benzenedisulfonic acid, 3,4-dihydroxybenzenesulfonicacid, 2,3-dihydroxybenzenesulfonic acid, 2,5-dihydroxybenzenesulfonicacid, 3,4,5-trihydroxybenzenesulfonic acid, and salts of these acids);water-soluble reducing agents represented by formula (I), (II), or (III)of JP-A-11-102045.

[0502] Spectral sensitization can be carried out for the purpose ofimparting spectral sensitivity in a desired light wavelength region tothe photosensitive emulsion in each layer of the photosensitive materialof the present invention.

[0503] Examples of spectral sensitizing dyes, which can be used in thephotosensitive material of the present invention, for spectralsensitization of blue, green and red light regions include, for example,those disclosed by F. M. Harmer, in Heterocyclic Compounds—Cyanine Dyesand Related Compounds, John Wiley & Sons, New York, London (1964).Specific examples of compounds and spectral sensitization processes thatcan be preferably used in the present invention include those describedin JP-A-62-215272, from page 22, right upper column to page 38. Inaddition, the spectral sensitizing dyes described in JP-A-3-123340 arevery preferred as red-sensitive spectral sensitizing dyes for silverhalide emulsion grains having a high silver chloride content, from theviewpoint of stability, adsorption strength, the temperature dependencyof exposure, and the like.

[0504] The amount of these spectral sensitizing dyes to be added can bevaried in a wide range depending on the occasion, and it is preferablyin the range of 0.5×10⁻⁶ mole to 1.0×10⁻² mole, more preferably in therange of 1.0×10⁻⁶ mole to 5.0×10⁻³ mole, per mole of silver halide.

[0505] The silver halide emulsions for use in the present invention aregenerally chemically sensitized. Chemical sensitization can be performedby utilizing a sulfur sensitization, represented by the addition of anunstable sulfur compound, noble metal sensitization represented by goldsensitization, and reduction sensitization, each singly or incombination thereof. Compounds that are preferably used for chemicalsensitization include those described in JP-A-62-215272, from page 18,right lower column to page 22, right upper column. Of these,gold-sensitized silver halide emulsion are particularly preferred, sincea change in photographic properties which occurs when scanning exposurewith laser beams or the like is conducted, can be further reduced bygold sensitization.

[0506] In order to conduct gold sensitization to the silver halideemulsion to be used in the present invention, various inorganic goldcompounds, gold (I) complexes having an inorganic ligand, and gold (I)compounds having an organic ligand may be used. Inorganic goldcompounds, such as chloroauric acid or salts thereof; and gold (I)complexes having an inorganic ligand, such as dithiocyanato goldcompounds (e.g., potassium dithiocyanatoaurate (I)), and dithiosulfatogold compounds (e.g., trisodium dithiosulfatoaurate (I)), are preferablyused.

[0507] As the gold (I) compounds having an organic ligand, the bis gold(I) mesoionic heterocycles described in JP-A-4-267249, for example, gold(I) tetrafluoroborate bis(1,4,5-trimethyl-1,2,4-triazolium-3-thiolate),the organic mercapto gold (I) complexes described in JP-A-11-218870, forexample, potassiumbis(1-[3-(2-sulfonatobenzamido)phenyl]-5-mercaptotetrazole potassiumsalt) aurate (I) pentahydrate, and the gold (I) compound with a nitrogencompound anion coordinated therewith described in JP-A-4-268550, forexample, gold (I) bis (1-methylhydantoinate) sodium salt tetrahydratemay be used. Also, the gold (I) thiolate compound described in U.S. Pat.No. 3,503,749, the gold compounds described in JP-A-8-69074,JP-A-8-69075 and JP-A-9-269554, and the compounds described in U.S. Pat.No. 5,620,841, U.S. Pat. No. 5,912,112, U.S. Pat. No. 5,620,841, U.S.Pat. No. 5,939,245, and U.S. Pat. No. 5,912,111 may be used.

[0508] The amount of these compounds to be added can be varied in a widerange depending on the occasion, and it is generally in the range of5×10⁻⁷ mole to 5×10⁻³ mole, preferably in the range of 5×10⁻⁶ mole to5×10⁻⁴ mole, per mole of silver halide.

[0509] The silver halide emulsion for use in the present invention ispreferably subjected to gold sensitization using a colloidal goldsulfide. A method of producing the colloidal gold sulfide is describedin, for example, Research Disclosure, No. 37154, Solid State Ionics,Vol. 79, pp. 60 to 66 (1995), and Compt. Rend. Hebt. Seances Acad. Sci.Sect. B, Vol. 263, p. 1328 (1966). Colloidal gold sulfide having variousgrain sizes are applicable, and even those having a grain diameter of 50nm or less are also usable. The amount of these compounds to be addedcan be varied in a wide range depending on the occasion, and it isgenerally in the range of 5×10⁻⁷ mol to 5×10⁻³ mol, preferably in therange of 5×10⁻⁶ mol to 5×10⁻⁴ mol, in terms of gold atom, per mol ofsilver halide.

[0510] In the present invention, gold sensitization may be used incombination with other sensitizing methods, for example, sulfursensitization, selenium sensitization, tellurium sensitization,reduction sensitization, or noble metal sensitization using a noblemetal compound other than gold compounds.

[0511] The photosensitive material of the present invention preferablycontains, in their hydrophilic colloid layers, dyes (particularlyoxonole dyes and cyanine dyes) that can be discolored by processing, asdescribed in European Patent No. 0337490 A2, pages 27 to 76, in order toprevent irradiation or halation or to enhance, for example, safelightsafety (immunity). Further, dyes described in European Patent No.0819977 are also preferably used in the present invention. Among thesewater-soluble dyes, some deteriorate color differentiation (separation)or safelight safety when used in an increased amount. Preferableexamples of the dye which can be used and which does not deterioratecolor separation include water-soluble dyes described in JP-A-5-127324,JP-A-5-127325 and JP-A-5-216185.

[0512] In the present invention, it is possible to use a colored layerwhich can be discolored during processing, in place of the water-solubledye, or in combination with the water-soluble dye. The colored layerthat can be discolored with a processing, to be used, may contact with aphotosensitive emulsion layer directly, or indirectly through aninterlayer containing an agent for preventing color-mixing duringprocessing, such as gelatin and hydroquinone. The colored layer ispreferably provided as a lower layer (closer to a support) with respectto the emulsion layer which develops the same primary color as the colorof the colored layer. It is possible to provide colored layersindependently, each corresponding to respective primary colors.Alternatively, only one layer selected from them may be provided. Inaddition, it is possible to provide a colored layer subjected tocoloring so as to match a plurality of primary-color regions. About theoptical reflection density of the colored layer, it is preferred that,at the wavelength which provides the highest optical density in a rangeof wavelengths used for exposure (a visible light region from 400 nm to700 nm for an ordinary printer exposure, and the wavelength of the lightgenerated from the light source in the case of scanning exposure), theoptical density is within the range of 0.2 to 3.0, more preferably 0.5to 2.5, and particularly preferably 0.8 to 2.0.

[0513] The colored layer described above may be formed by a knownmethod. For example, there are a method in which a dye in a state of adispersion of solid fine-particles is incorporated in a hydrophiliccolloid layer, as described in JP-A-2-282244, from page 3, upper rightcolumn to page 8, and JP-A-3-7931, from page 3, upper right column topage 11, left under column; a method in which an anionic dye ismordanted in a cationic polymer, a method in which a dye is adsorbedonto fine grains of silver halide or the like and fixed in the layer,and a method in which a colloidal silver is used as described inJP-A-1-239544. As to a method of dispersing fine-powder of a dye insolid state, for example, JP-A-2-308244, pages 4 to 13 describes amethod in which fine particles of dye which is at least substantiallywater-insoluble at the pH of 6 or less, but at least substantiallywater-soluble at the pH of 8 or more, are incorporated. The method ofmordanting anionic dyes in a cationic polymer is described, for example,in JP-A-2-84637, pages 18 to 26. U.S. Pat. Nos. 2,688,601 and 3,459,563disclose a method of preparing a colloidal silver for use as a lightabsorber. Among these methods, preferred are the methods ofincorporating fine particles of dye and of using a colloidal silver.

[0514] When the present invention is applied to a color paper, the colorphotographic printing paper preferably has at least one yellowcolor-forming silver halide emulsion layer, at least one magentacolor-forming silver halide emulsion layer, and at least one cyancolor-forming silver halide emulsion layer, on a support. Generally,these silver halide emulsion layers are in the order, from the support,of the yellow color-forming silver halide emulsion layer, the magentacolor-forming silver halide emulsion layer, and the cyan color-formingsilver halide emulsion layer.

[0515] However, another layer arrangement which is different from theabove, may be adopted.

[0516] In the photosensitive material of the present invention, a yellowcoupler-containing silver halide emulsion layer may be provided at anyposition on a support. In the case where silver halide tabular grainsare contained in the yellow coupler-containing layer, it is preferablethat the yellow coupler-containing layer is positioned more apart fromthe support than at least one of a magenta coupler-containing silverhalide emulsion layer and a cyan coupler-containing silver halideemulsion layer. Further, it is preferable that the yellowcoupler-containing silver halide emulsion layer is positioned most apartfrom the support of other silver halide emulsion layers, from theviewpoint of color-development acceleration, desilvering acceleration,and reduction in a residual color due to a sensitizing dye. Further, itis preferable that the cyan coupler-containing silver halide emulsionlayer is provided in the middle of other silver halide emulsion layers,from the viewpoint of reduction in blix fading. On the other hand, it ispreferable that the cyan coupler-containing silver halide emulsion layeris the lowest layer, from the viewpoint of reduction in light fading.Further, each of a yellow-color-forming layer, a magenta-color-forminglayer and a cyan-color-forming layer may be composed of two or threelayers. It is also preferable that a color-forming layer is formed byproviding a silver halide emulsion-free layer containing a coupler inadjacent to a silver halide emulsion layer, as described in, forexample, JP-A-4-75055, JP-A-9-114035, JP-A-10-246940, and U.S. Pat. No.5,576,159.

[0517] For example, as a photographic support (base), a transmissivetype support or a reflective type support may be used. As thetransmissive type support, it is preferred to use transparent supports,such as a cellulose nitrate film, and a transparent film ofpolyethyleneterephthalate, a cellulose triacetate film, or a polyesterof 2,6-naphthalenedicarboxylic acid (NDCA) and ethylene glycol (EG), ora polyester of NDCA, terephthalic acid and EG, provided thereon with aninformation-recording layer such as a magnetic layer. In the presentinvention, a reflective support (reflective-type support) is preferable.As the reflective type support, it is especially preferable to use areflective support having a substrate laminated thereon with a pluralityof polyethylene layers or polyester layers (water-proof resin layers orlaminate layers), at least one of which contains a white pigment such astitanium oxide.

[0518] Preferred examples of silver halide emulsions and other materials(additives or the like) for use in the present invention, photographicconstitutional layers (arrangement of the layers or the like), andprocessing methods for processing the photographic materials andadditives for processing are disclosed, for example, in JP-A-62-215272,JP-A-2-33144 and European Patent No. 0355660 A2. Particularly, thosedisclosed in European Patent No. 0355660 A2 are preferably used.Further, it is also preferred to use silver halide color photographicphotosensitive materials and processing methods thereof disclosed in,for example, JP-A-5-34889, JP-A-4-359249, JP-A-4-313753, JP-A-4-270344,JP-A-5-66527, JP-A-4-34548, JP-A-4-145433, JP-A-2-854, JP-A-1-158431,JP-A-2-90145, JP-A-3-194539, JP-A-2-93641 and European PatentPublication No. 0520457 A2.

[0519] In the present invention, as the above-described reflectivesupport and silver halide emulsion, as well as the different kinds ofmetal ions to be doped in the silver halide grains, the storagestabilizers or antifogging agents of the silver halide emulsion, themethods of chemical sensitization (sensitizers), the methods of spectralsensitization (spectral sensitizers), the cyan, magenta, and yellowcouplers and the emulsifying and dispersing methods thereof, the dyeimage stability-improving agents (stain inhibitors and discolorationinhibitors), the dyes (colored layers), the kinds of gelatin, the layerstructure of the photosensitive material, and the film pH of thephotosensitive material, those described in the patent publications asshown in the following table are particularly preferably used in thepresent invention. TABLE 1 Element JP-A-7-104448 JP-A-7-77775JP-A-7-301895 Reflective-type Column 7, line 12 to Column 35, line 43 toColumn 5, line 40 to bases Column 12, line 19 Column 44, line 1 Column9, line 26 Silver halide Column 72, line 29 to Column 44, line 36 toColumn 77, line 48 to emulsions Column 74, line 18 Column 46, line 29Column 80, line 28 Different metal Column 74, lines 19 to Column 46,line 30 to Column 80, line 29 to ion species 44 Column 47, line 5 Column81, line 6 Storage Column 75, lines 9 to Column 47, lines 20 Column 18,line 11 to stabilizers or 18 to 29 Column 31, line 37 antifoggants(Especially, mercaptoheterocyclic compounds) Chemical Column 74, line 45to Column 47, lines 7 to 17 Column 81, lines 9 to 17 sensitizing Column75, line 6 methods (Chemical sensitizers) Spectrally Column 75, line 19to Column 47, line 30 to Column 81, line 21 to sensitizing Column 76,line 45 Column 49, line 6 Column 82, line 48 methods (Spectralsensitizers) Cyan couplers Column 12, line 20 to Column 62, line 50 toColumn 88, line 49 to Column 39, line 49 Column 63, line 16 Column 89,line 16 Yellow couplers Column 87, line 40 to Column 63, lines 17 Column89, lines 17 to 30 Column 88, line 3 to 30 Magenta couplers Column 88,lines 4 to Column 63, line 3 to Column 31, line 34 to 18 Column 64, line11 Column 77, line 44 and column 88, lines 32 to 46 Emulsifying andColumn 71, line 3 to Column 61, lines 36 Column 87, lines 35 to 48dispersing Column 72, line 11 to 49 methods of couplers Dye-image-Column 39, line 50 to Column 61, line 50 to Column 87, line 49 topreservability Column 70, line 9 Column 62, line 49 Column 88, line 48improving agents (antistaining agents) Anti-fading agents Column 70,line 10 to Column 71, line 2 Dyes (coloring Column 77, line 42 to Column7, line 14 to Column 9, line 27 to layers) Column 78, line 41 Column 19,line 42, and Column 18, line 10 Column 50, line 3 to Column 51, line 14Gelatins Column 78, lines 42 to Column 51, lines 15 to Column 83, lines13 48 20 to 19 Layer construction Column 39, lines 11 to Column 44,lines 2 to 35 Column 31, line 38 to of photosensitive 26 Column 32, line33 materials pH of coated film of Column 72, lines 12 to photosensitive28 Scanning exposure Column 76, line 6 to Column 49, line 7 to Column82, line 49 to Column 77, line 41 Column 50, line 2 Column 83, line 12Preservatives in Column 88, line 19 to developing solution Column 89,line 22

[0520] As cyan, magenta and yellow couplers which can be additionallyused in the present invention, in addition to the above mentioned ones,those disclosed in JP-A-62-215272, page 91, right upper column, line 4to page 121, left upper column, line 6, JP-A-2-33144, page 3, rightupper column, line 14 to page 18, left upper column, bottom line, andpage 30, right upper column, line 6 to page 35, right under column, line11, European Patent No. 0355,660 (A2), page 4, lines 15 to 27, page 5,line 30 to page 28, bottom line, page 45, lines 29 to 31, page 47, line23 to page 63, line 50, are also advantageously used.

[0521] Further, it is preferred in the present invention to addcompounds represented by formula (II) or (III) in WO 98/33760 andcompounds represented by formula (D) described in JP-A-10-221825.

[0522] As the cyan dye-forming coupler (hereinafter also referred to as“cyan coupler”) which can be used in the present invention,pyrrolotriazole-series couplers are preferably used, and morespecifically, couplers represented by any of formulae (I) and (II) inJP-A-5-313324 and couplers represented by formula (I) in JP-A-6-347960are preferred. Exemplified couplers described in these publications areparticularly preferred. Further, phenol-series or naphthol-series cyancouplers are also preferred. For example, cyan couplers represented byformula (ADF) described in JP-A-10-333297 are preferred. As preferablecyan couplers other than the foregoing cyan couplers, there arepyrroloazole-type cyan couplers described in European Patent Nos. 0 488248 and 0 491 197 (A1), 2,5-diacylamino phenol couplers described inU.S. Pat. No. 5,888,716, pyrazoloazole-type cyan couplers having anelectron-withdrawing group or a group bonding via hydrogen bond at the6-position, as described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,873,183 and 4,916,051, andparticularly pyrazoloazole-type cyan couplers having a carbamoyl groupat the 6-position, as described in JP-A-8-171185, JP-A-8-311360 andJP-A-8-339060.

[0523] In addition, the cyan dye-forming coupler for use in the presentinvention can also be a diphenylimidazole-series cyan coupler describedin JP-A-2-33144; as well as a 3-hydroxypyridine-series cyan coupler(particularly a 2-equivalent coupler formed by allowing a 4-equivalentcoupler of a coupler (42), to have a chlorine splitting-off group, andcouplers (6) and (9), enumerated as specific examples are particularlypreferable) described in EP 0333185 A2; a cyclic active methylene-seriescyan coupler (particularly couplers 3, 8, and 34 enumerated as specificexamples are particularly preferable) described in JP-A-64-32260; apyrrolopyrozole-type cyan coupler described in European Patent No.0456226 A1; and a pyrroloimidazole-type cyan coupler described inEuropean Patent No. 0484909.

[0524] Among these cyan couplers, pyrroloazole-series cyan couplersrepresented by formula (I) described in JP-A-11-282138 are particularlypreferred. The descriptions of the paragraph Nos. 0012 to 0059 includingexemplified cyan couplers (1) to (47) of the above JP-A-11-282138 can beentirely applied to the present invention, and therefore they arepreferably incorporated herein by reference.

[0525] As the magenta dye-forming coupler (which may be referred tosimply as a “magenta coupler” hereinafter) that can be used in thepresent invention, use can be made of any of 5-pyrazolone-series magentacouplers and pyrazoloazole-series magenta couplers such as thosedescribed in the above-mentioned patent publications in the above table.Among these, preferred are pyrazolotriazole couplers in which asecondary or tertiary alkyl group is directly bonded to the 2-, 3- or6-position of the pyrazolotriazole ring, such as those described inJP-A-61-65245; pyrazoloazole couplers having a sulfonamido group in itsmolecule, such as those described in JP-A-61-65246; pyrazoloazolecouplers having an alkoxyphenylsulfonamido ballasting group, such asthose described in JP-A-61-147254; and pyrazoloazole couplers having analkoxy or aryloxy group at the 6-position, such as those described inEuropean Patent Nos. 0226849 A2 and 0294785 A, in view of the hue andstability of image to be formed therefrom and color-forming property ofthe couplers. Particularly as the magenta coupler, the pyrazoloazolecouplers represented by formula (M-I) described in JP-A-8-122984 arepreferred. The description of paragraph Nos. 0009 to 0026 of the aboveJP-A-8-122984 is applied to the present invention and hereinincorporated by reference. In addition, the pyrazoloazole couplershaving a steric hindrance group at both of the 3- and the 6-positions,as described in European Patent (EP) Nos.854,384 and 884,640 are alsopreferably used.

[0526] The yellow dye-forming coupler (herein also referred to simply as“yellow coupler”) that can be used in the present invention, is notlimited in particular, and, for example, those described in the abovetable can be used as the yellow dye-forming coupler. It is preferable,in the present invention, that the yellow dye-forming couplerrepresented by formula (I) is used singly or in combination with otheryellow dye-forming coupler(s). As the above other yellow dye-formingcoupler to be used in combination, use can be preferably made ofacylacetamide-type yellow couplers in which the acyl group has a3-membered to 5-membered cyclic structure, as described in EuropeanPatent No. 0 447 969 A1; malondianilide-type yellow couplers having acyclic structure, as described in European Patent No. 0482552 A1;pyrrole-2 or 3-yl- or indole-2 or 3-yl-carbonylacetoanilide-seriescouplers, as described in European Patent Nos. 953 870 A1, 953 871 A1,953 872 A1, 953 873 A1, 953 874 A1 and 953 875 A1; acylacetamide-typeyellow couplers having a dioxane structure, as described in U.S. Pat.No. 5,118,599; and acetamide-type yellow couplers that is substitutedwith a heterocycle at the α-position thereof, as described in U.S. Pat.No. 5,455,149 and Europan Patent No. 1 246 006, in addition to thecompounds described in the above-mentioned table. Above all,acylacetamide-type yellow couplers in which the acyl group is a1-alkylcyclopropane-1-carbonyl group, malondianilide-type yellowcouplers in which one of the anilido groups constitutes an indolinering, and acetamide-type yellow couplers that is substituted with aheterocycle at the α-position thereof, are especially preferably used.These couplers may be used singly or in combination.

[0527] It is preferred that couplers for use in the present invention,are pregnated into a loadable latex polymer (as described, for example,in U.S. Pat. No. 4,203,716) in the presence (or absence) of thehigh-boiling-point organic solvent described in the foregoing table, orthey are dissolved in the presence (or absence) of the foregoinghigh-boiling-point organic solvent with a polymer insoluble in water butsoluble in an organic solvent, and then emulsified and dispersed into anaqueous hydrophilic colloid solution. Examples of the water-insolublebut organic solvent-soluble polymer which can be preferably used,include the homo-polymers and co-polymers as disclosed in U.S. Pat.No.4,857,449, from column 7 to column 15 and WO 88/00723, from page 12to page 30. The use of methacrylate-series or acrylamide-seriespolymers, especially acrylamide-series polymers are more preferable inview of color-image stabilization and the like.

[0528] In the present invention, known color mixing-inhibitors may beused. Among these compounds, those described in the following patentpublications are preferred.

[0529] For example, high molecular weight redox compounds described inJP-A-5-333501; phenidone- or hydrazine-series compounds as described in,for example, WO 98/33760 and U.S. Pat. No. 4,923,787; and white couplersas described in, for example, JP-A-5-249637, JP-A-10-282615 and GermanPatent Publication No. 19629142 A1, may be used. Particularly, in orderto accelerate developing speed by increasing the pH of a developingsolution, redox compounds described in, for example, German Patent No.19,618,786 A1, European Patent Nos. 0,839,623 A1 and 0,842,975 A1,German Patent No. 19,806,846 A1 and French Patent No. 2,760,460 A1, arealso preferably used.

[0530] In the present invention, as an ultraviolet absorber, it ispreferred to use compounds having a high molar extinction coefficientand a triazine skeleton. For example, those described in the followingpatent publications can be used. These compounds are preferably added tothe photosensitive layer or/and the light-nonsensitive layer. Forexample, use can be made of those described, in JP-A-46-3335,JP-A-55-152776, JP-A-5-197074, JP-A-5-232630, JP-A-5-307232,JP-A-6-211813, JP-A-8-53427, JP-A-8-234364, JP-A-8-239368, JP-A-9-31067,JP-A-10-115898, JP-A-10-147577, JP-A-10-182621, German Patent No.19,739,797A, European Patent No. 0,711,804 A and JP-T-8-501291 (“JP-T”means searched and published International patent application), and thelike.

[0531] As the binder or protective colloid, which can be used in thephotosensitive material according to the present invention, gelatin isused advantageously, but another hydrophilic colloid can be used singlyor in combination with gelatin. It is preferable for the gelatin thatthe content of heavy metals, such as Fe, Cu, Zn and Mn, included asimpurities, be reduced to 5 ppm or below, more preferably 3 ppm orbelow. Further, the amount of calcium contained in the photosensitivematerial is preferably 20 mg/m² or less, more preferably 10 mg/m² orless, and most preferably 5 mg/m² or less.

[0532] In the present invention, it is preferred to add an antibacterial(fungi-preventing) agent and antimold agent, as described inJP-A-63-271247, in order to destroy various kinds of molds and bacteriawhich propagate in a hydrophilic colloid layer and deteriorate theimage. Further, the pH of the coated film of the photosensitive materialis preferably in the range of 4.0 to 7.0, more preferably in the rangeof 4.0 to 6.5.

[0533] In the present invention, a surface-active agent may be added tothe photosensitive material, in view of improvement incoating-stability, prevention of static electricity from being occurred,and adjustment of the charge amount. As the surface-active agent, thereare anionic, cationic, betaine and nonionic surfactants. Examplesthereof include those described in JP-A-5-333492. As the surface-activeagent for use in the present invention, a fluorine-containingsurface-active agent is also preferred. The fluorine-containingsurface-active agent may be used singly or in combination with knownanother surface-active agent. The fluorine-containing surfactant ispreferably used in combination with known another surface-active agent.The amount of the surface-active agent to be added to the photosensitivematerial is not particularly limited, but generally in the range of1×10⁻⁵ to 1 g/m², preferably in the range of 1×10⁻⁴ to 1×10⁻¹ g/m², andmore preferably in the range of 1×10⁻³ to 1×10⁻² g/m².

[0534] The photosensitive material of the present invention can form animage, by an exposure step in which the photosensitive material isirradiated with light according to image information, and a developmentstep in which the photosensitive material irradiated with light isprocessed to develop an image.

[0535] The photosensitive material of the present invention canpreferably be used, in a scanning exposure system using a cathode raytube (CRT), in addition to the printing system using a usual negativeprinter. The cathode ray tube exposure apparatus is simpler and morecompact, and therefore less expensive than an apparatus using a laser.Further, optical axis and color (hue) can easily be adjusted. In acathode ray tube which is used for image-wise exposure, variouslight-emitting materials which emit a light in the spectral region, areused as occasion demands. For example, any one of red-light-emittingmaterials, green-light-emitting materials, blue-light-emittingmaterials, or a mixture of two or more of these light-emitting materialsmay be used. The spectral regions are not limited to the above red,green and blue, and fluorophoroes which can emit a light in a region ofyellow, orange, purple or infrared can be used. Particularly, a cathoderay tube which emits a white light by means of a mixture of theselight-emitting materials, is often used.

[0536] In the case where the photosensitive material has a plurality ofphotosensitive layers each having different spectral sensitivitydistribution from each other and also the cathode ray tube has afluorescent substance which emits light in a plurality of spectralregions, exposure to a plurality of colors may be carried out at thesame time. Namely, a plurality of color image signals may be input intoa cathode ray tube, to allow light to be emitted from the surface of thetube. Alternatively, a method in which an image signal of each of colorsis successively input and light of each of colors is emitted in order,and then exposure is carried out through a film capable of cutting acolor other than the emitted color, i.e., a surface successive exposure,may be used. Generally, among these methods, the surface successiveexposure is preferred from the viewpoint of high quality enhancement,because a cathode ray tube having a high resolving power can be used.

[0537] The photosensitive material of the present invention canpreferably be used in the digital scanning exposure system usingmonochromatic high density light, such as a gas laser, a light-emittingdiode, a semiconductor laser, a second harmonic generation light source(SHG) comprising a combination of nonlinear optical crystal with asemiconductor laser or a solid state laser using a semiconductor laseras an excitation light source. It is preferred to use a semiconductorlaser, or a second harmonic generation light source (SHG) comprising acombination of nonlinear optical crystal with a solid state laser or asemiconductor laser, to make a system more compact and inexpensive. Inparticular, to design a compact and inexpensive apparatus having alonger duration of life and high stability, use of a semiconductor laseris preferable; and it is preferred that at least one of exposure lightsources would be a semiconductor laser.

[0538] When such a scanning exposure light source is used, the maximumspectral sensitivity wavelength of the photosensitive material of thepresent invention can be arbitrarily set up according to the wavelengthof a scanning exposure light source to be used. Since oscillationwavelength of a laser can be made half, using a SHG light source (asecond harmonic generation light source) obtainable by a combination ofa nonlinear optical crystal with a semiconductor laser or a solid statelaser using a semiconductor as an excitation light source, blue lightand green light can be obtained. Accordingly, it is possible to have thespectral sensitivity maximum of a photosensitive material in normalthree wavelength regions of blue, green and red. The exposure time insuch a scanning exposure is defined as the time necessary to expose thesize of the picture element (pixel) with the density of the pictureelement being 400 dpi, and preferred exposure time is 1×10⁻⁴ sec or lessand more preferably 1×10⁻⁶ sec or less. Particularly preferably, theexposure is carried out by scanning exposure, wherein the exposure timeis 1×10⁻⁸ to 1×10⁻⁴ sec per picture element and adjacent rasters areoverlapped (the overlap between rasters is preferably in the range offrom ⅛ to ⅞, more preferably in the range of from ⅕ to ⅘), becauseimprovement is made with respect to the reciprocity law failure.Preferable scanning exposure systems that can be applied to the presentinvention are described in detail in the aforementioned table.

[0539] The silver halide color photographic photosensitive material ofthe present invention can be preferably used in combination with theexposure and development systems described, for example, in thefollowing known literatures. Example of the development system includethe automatic print and development system described in JP-A-10-333253,the photosensitive material conveying apparatus described inJP-A-2000-10206, a recording system including the image readingapparatus, as described in JP-A-11-215312, an exposure systems with thecolor image recording method, as described in JP-A-11-88619 andJP-A-10-202950, a digital photo print system including the remotediagnosis method, as described in JP-A-10-210206, and a photo printsystem including the image recording apparatus, as described inJP-A-2000-310822.

[0540] The preferred scanning exposure methods which can be applied tothe present invention are described in detail in the publications in theabove table 1.

[0541] It is preferred to use a band stop filter, as described in U.S.Pat. No.4,880,726, when the photographic material of the presentinvention is subjected to exposure with a printer. Color mixing of lightcan be excluded and color reproducibility is remarkably improved by theabove means.

[0542] In the present invention, a yellow microdot pattern may bepreviously formed by pre-exposure before giving an image information, tothereby perform a copy restraint, as described in European Patent Nos.0789270 A1 and 0789480 A1.

[0543] The photosensitive material of the present invention isparticularly suitable for a silver halide color photographiclight-sensitive material having a silver halide emulsion layercontaining a dye-forming coupler that forms a dye upon a couplingreaction with an oxidation product of an aromatic primary amine colordeveloping agent.

[0544] Further, in order to process the photosensitive material of thepresent invention, processing materials and processing methods describedin JP-A-2-207250, page 26, right lower column, line 1, to page 34, rightupper column, line 9, and in JP-A-4-97355, page 5, left upper column,line 17, to page 18, right lower column, line 20, can be preferablyapplied, and these are herein preferably incorporated by reference.Further, as the preservative that can be used for this developingsolution, compounds described in the patent publications listed in theabove Table are preferably used.

[0545] The present invention is also preferably applied to aphotosensitive material having rapid processing suitability. In the caseof conducting rapid processing, the color-developing time is preferably60 sec or less, more preferably from 50 sec to 6 sec, further preferablyfrom 30 sec to 6 sec, and most preferably from 20 sec to 10 sec.Likewise, the blix time is preferably 60 sec or less, more preferablyfrom 50 sec to 6 sec, further preferably from 30 sec to 6 sec, and mostpreferably from 20 sec to 10 sec. Further, the washing or stabilizingtime is preferably 150 sec or less, and more preferably from 130 sec to6 sec.

[0546] Herein, the term “color-developing time” as used herein means aperiod of time required from the beginning of dipping a photosensitivematerial into a color-developing solution until the photosensitivematerial is dipped into a blix solution in the subsequent processingstep. In the case where a processing is carried out using, for example,an autoprocessor, the color-developing time is the sum total of a timein which a photosensitive material has been dipped in a color-developingsolution (so-called “time in the solution”) and a time in which thephotosensitive material has left the solution and been conveyed in airtoward a bleach-fixing bath in the step subsequent to color development(so-called “time in the air”). Likewise, the term “blix time” as usedherein means a period of time required from the beginning of dipping thephotosensitive material into a blix solution until the photosensitivematerial is dipped into a washing bath or a stabilizing bath in thesubsequent processing step. Further, the term “washing or stabilizingtime” as used herein means a period of time required from the beginningof dipping the photosensitive material into a washing solution or astabilizing solution until the end of the dipping toward a drying step(so-called “time in the solution”).

[0547] Examples of a development method applicable to the photosensitivematerial of the present invention after exposure, include a conventionalwet system, such as a development method using a developing solutioncontaining an alkali agent and a developing agent, and a developmentmethod wherein a developing agent is incorporated in the photosensitivematerial and an activator solution, e.g., a developing agent-freealkaline solution is employed for the development, as well as a heatdevelopment system using no processing solution. In particular, theactivator method is preferred to the other methods, because theprocessing solutions contain no developing agent, thereby it enableseasy management and handling of the processing solutions and reductionin waste disposal load to make for environmental preservation.

[0548] The preferable developing agents or their precursors incorporatedin the photosensitive materials in the case of adopting the activatormethod include the hydrazine-type compounds described in, for example,JP-A-8-234388, JP-A-9-152686, JP-A-9-152693, JP-A-9-211814 andJP-A-9-160193.

[0549] Further, the processing method in which the photographic materialreduced in the amount of silver to be applied undergoes the imageamplification processing using hydrogen peroxide (intensificationprocessing), can be employed preferably. In particular, it is preferableto apply this processing method to the activator method. Specifically,the image-forming methods utilizing an activator solution containinghydrogen peroxide, as disclosed in JP-A-8-297354 and JP-A-9-152695 canbe preferably used. Although the processing with an activator solutionis generally followed by a desilvering step in the activator method, thedesilvering step can be omitted in the case of applying the imageamplification processing method to photographic materials having areduced silver amount. In such a case, washing or stabilizationprocessing can follow the processing with an activator solution toresult in simplification of the processing process. On the other hand,when the system of reading the image information from photographicmaterials by means of a scanner or the like is employed, the processingform requiring no desilvering step can be applied, even if thephotographic materials are those having a high silver amount, such asphotographic materials for shooting.

[0550] As the processing materials and processing methods of theactivator solution, desilvering solution (bleach/fixing solution),washing solution and stabilizing solution, which can be used in thepresent invention, known ones can be used. Preferably, those describedin Research Disclosure, Item 36544, pp. 536-541 (September 1994), andJP-A-8-234388 can be used in the present invention.

[0551] According to the present invention, it is possible to provide aphotosensitive material, in which a color image is not discolored for along time, and that has high storability. Further, according to thepresent invention, it is possible to provide a photosensitive material,in which a photographic additive that exhibits a sufficient effect toprevent a dye image from fading or discoloring is contained, and bywhich material a sufficient dye density is obtained even in a shortdevelopment processing time.

[0552] According to the present invention, it is possible to provide asilver halide color photographic photosensitive material and animage-forming method that are excellent in rapid processing suitability.Further, it is possible to provide a silver halide color photographicphotosensitive material that is excellent in color-forming property,color reproduction, whiteness, and image fastness after processing.Furthermore, it is possible to provide an image-forming method that isexcellent in processing stability when processed with a runningsolution.

[0553] The present invention will be described in more detail based onthe following examples, but the present invention is not limitedthereto.

EXAMPLES Example 1-1

[0554] (Preparation of Sample 1101)

[0555] (Preparation of Blue-sensitive Layer Emulsion B-H)

[0556] To deionized and distilled water containing a deionized gelatin,silver nitrate and sodium chloride were added and mixed, with stirring,according to a double jet method, to prepare high silver chloride cubicgrains. During a process of the preparation, potassium bromide was addedat the step of from 60% to 95% addition of the entire silver nitrateamount, so that the potassium bromide amount became 1.5 mol % per mol ofthe finished silver halide. At the step of from 70% to 90% addition ofthe entire silver nitrate amount, K₄[Fe(CN)₆], K₄[IrCl₆] andK₂[RhBr₅(H₂O)] were added. Further, K₂[IrCl₅(H₂O)] and K[IrCl₄(H₂O)₂]were added at the step of from 75% to 98% addition of the entire silvernitrate amount. Furthermore, a potassium iodide solution was added andmixed with vigorous stirring at the step of completion of 90% additionof the entire silver nitrate amount, so that the iodine amount became0.27 mol % per mol of the finished silver halide. The obtained emulsiongrains were monodisperse cubic silver iodobromochloride grains having aside length of 0.54 μm and a variation coefficient of 8.5%. After beingsubjected to a flocculation desalting treatment, the following wereadded to the resulting emulsion: gelatin, compounds (Ab-1), (Ab-2) and(Ab-3), and calcium nitrate, to carry out re-dispersion.

[0557] The thus re-dispersed emulsion was dissolved at 40° C., andsensitizing dye S-1, sensitizing dye S-2 and sensitizing dye S-3 wereadded thereto, for optimal spectral sensitization. Then, the resultingemulsion was ripened by adding sodium benzene thiosulfonate,triethylthiourea as a sulfur sensitizer, and Compound-4 as a goldsensitizer, for optimal chemical sensitization. Further,1-(5-methylureidophenyl)-5-mercaptotetrazole; Compound-5; a mixturewhose major components were a compound having two recurring unitsrepresented by Compound-6 (in which n was 2), a compound having threerecurring units represented by Compound-7, in which both ends of thiscompound each were a hydroxyl group; a compound having three recurringunits represented by Compound-6; Compound-8; and potassium bromide wereadded, to complete chemical sensitization. The thus-obtained emulsionwas referred to as Emulsion B-H.

[0558] (Preparation of Blue-sensitive Layer Emulsion B-L)

[0559] Emulsion grains were prepared in the same manner as in thepreparation of emulsion B-H, except that the temperature and theaddition rate at the step of mixing silver nitrate and sodium chlorideby simultaneous addition were changed, and that the amounts ofrespective metal complexes that were to be added in the course of theaddition of silver nitrate and sodium chloride were changed. Thethus-obtained emulsion grains were monodisperse cubic silveriodobromochloride grains having a side length of 0.34 μm and a variationcoefficient of 9.5%. After re-dispersion of this emulsion, Emulsion B-Lwas prepared in the same manner as emulsion B-H, except that the amountsof various compounds to be added in the preparation of Emulsion B-H werechanged.

[0560] (Preparation of Green-sensitive Layer Emulsion M-H)

[0561] Emulsion grains were prepared in the same manner as in thepreparation of the above-described Blue-sensitive emulsion. Thethus-obtained emulsion grains were monodisperse cubic silveriodobromochloride grains having a side length of 0.48 μm and a variationcoefficient of 8.0%. The emulsion was subjected to a flocculationdesalting process, followed by re-dispersion.

[0562] The emulsion was dissolved at 40° C., and sodium benzenethiosulfate, p-glutaramidophenyldisulfide, sodium thiosulfatepentahydrate as a sulfur sensitizer, and(bis(1,4,5-trimethyl-1,2,4-triazolium-3-thiorato)aurate(I).tetrafluoroborate) as a gold sensitizer were added, and the emulsionwas ripened for optimal chemical sensitization. Thereafter,1-(3-acetoamidophenyl)-5-mercaptotetrazole,1-(5-methylureidophenyl)-5-mercaptotetrazole, Compound-5, Compound-8,and potassium bromide were added. Further, in a midway of the emulsionpreparation step, Dye-1, Dye-2, Dye-3, and Dye-4 were added assensitizing dyes, to conduct spectral sensitization. The thus-obtainedemulsion was referred to as Emulsion M-H.

[0563] (Preparation of Green-sensitive Layer Emulsion M-L)

[0564] Emulsion grains were prepared in the same manner as in thepreparation of emulsion M-H, except that the temperature and theaddition rate at the step of mixing silver nitrate and sodium chlorideby simultaneous addition were changed, and that the amounts ofrespective metal complexes that were to be added in the course of theaddition of silver nitrate and sodium chloride were changed. Thethus-obtained emulsion grains were monodisperse cubic silveriodobromochloride grains having a side length of 0.25 μm and a variationcoefficient of 9.8%. After re-dispersion of this emulsion, Emulsion M-Lwas prepared in the same manner as emulsion M-H, except that the amountof various compounds to be added in the preparation of Emulsion M-H werechanged.

[0565] (Preparation of Red-sensitive Layer Emulsion C-H)

[0566] To deionized and distilled water containing a deionized gelatin,silver nitrate and sodium chloride were added and mixed, with stirring,according to a double jet method, to prepare high silver chloride cubicgrains. During a process of the preparation, potassium bromide was addedat the step of from 65% to 90% addition of the entire silver nitrateamount, so that the potassium bromide amount became 2.5 mol % per mol ofthe finished silver halide. At the step of from 60% to 85% addition ofthe entire silver nitrate amount, K₄[Ru(CN)₆],K₂[Ir(5-methylthiazole)Cl₅], Cs₂[RuCl₅(NO)], and Cs₂[OsCl₅(NO)] wereadded. Further, K₂[IrCl₅(H₂O)] was added at the step of from 75% to 98%addition of the entire silver nitrate amount. Furthermore, a potassiumiodide aqueous solution was added and mixed with vigorous stirring atthe step of completion of 88% addition of the entire silver nitrateamount, so that the iodine amount became 0.15 mol % per mol of thefinished silver halide. The obtained emulsion grains were monodispersecubic silver iodobromochloride grains having a side length of 0.39 μmand a variation coefficient of 10%. The resulting emulsion was subjectedto a flocculation desalting treatment and re-dispersing treatment in thesame manner as described in the above.

[0567] The emulsion was dissolved at 40° C., and Sensitizing dye Dye-5,Compound-9, triethylthiourea as a sulfur sensitizer, and Compound-4 as agold sensitizer were added, and the emulsion was ripened for optimalchemical sensitization. Thereafter,1-(3-acetoamidophenyl)-5-mercaptotetrazole,1-(5-methylureidophenyl)-5-mercaptotetrazole, Compound-5, Compound-8,and potassium bromide were added. The thus-obtained emulsion wasreferred to as Emulsion C-H.

[0568] (Preparation of Red-sensitive Layer Emulsion C-L)

[0569] Emulsion grains were prepared in the same manner as in thepreparation of emulsion C-H, except that the temperature and theaddition rate at the step of mixing silver nitrate and sodium chlorideby simultaneous addition were changed, and that the amounts ofrespective metal complexes that were to be added in the course of theaddition of silver nitrate and sodium chloride were changed. Thethus-obtained emulsion grains were monodisperse cubic silveriodobromochloride grains having a side length of 0.29 μm and a variationcoefficient of 9.9%. After this emulsion was subjected to a flocculationdesalting treatment and re-dispersion, Emulsion C-L was prepared in thesame manner as emulsion C-H, except that the amounts of variouscompounds to be added in the preparation of Emulsion C-H were changed.

[0570] (Preparation of a Coating Solution for the First Layer)

[0571] Into 17 g of a solvent (Solv-4), 17 g of a solvent (Solv-9), and60 ml of ethyl acetate were dissolved 34.0 g of a yellow coupler(Examplified Compound (6)). This solution was emulsified and dispersedin 270 g of a 20 mass % aqueous gelatin solution containing 4 g ofsodium dodecylbenzenesulfonate with a high-speed stirring emulsifier(dissolver). Water was added thereto, to prepare 900 g of EmulsifiedDispersion A.

[0572] Separately, the above-described Emulsified Dispersion A and theabove-described Emulsions B-H and B-L were mixed and dissolved, toprepare a coating solution for the first layer having the compositionshown below. The coating amount of the emulsion is in terms of silver.

[0573] The coating solutions for the second to seventh layers wereprepared in the similar manner as the coating solution for the firstlayer. As a gelatin hardener for each layer,1-oxy-3,5-dichloro-s-triazine sodium salt (H-1), (H-2), and (H-3) wereused. Further, (Ab-1), (Ab-2), and (Ab-3) were added to each layer, sothat their total amounts would be 15.0 mg/m², 60.0 mg/m², and 5.0 mg/m²,respectively.

[0574] Further, 1-(3-methylureidophenyl)-5-mercaptotetrazole was addedto the second layer, the fourth layer, and the sixth layer, in amountsof 0.2 mg/m², 0.2 mg/m², and 0.6 mg/m², respectively.

[0575] Further, 4-hydroxy-6-methyl-1,3,3a,7-tetrazaindene was added tothe blue-sensitive emulsion layer and the green-sensitive emulsionlayer, in amounts of 1×10⁻⁴ mol and 2×10⁻⁴ mol, respectively, per mol ofthe silver halide.

[0576] Further, to the red-sensitive emulsion layer, was added acopolymer latex of methacrylic acid and butyl acrylate (1:1 in massratio; average molecular weight, 200,000 to 400,000) in an amount of0.05 g/m².

[0577] Further, disodium catecol-3,5-disulfonate was added to the secondlayer, the fourth layer and the sixth layer, so that respective amountswould be 6 mg/m², 6 mg/m² and 18 mg/m².

[0578] Further, to each layer, sodium polystyrene sulfonate wasoptionally added to adjust viscosity of the coating solutions.

[0579] Further, in order to prevent irradiation, the following dyes(coating amounts are shown in parentheses) were added.

[0580] (Layer Constitution)

[0581] The composition of each layer is shown below. The numbers showcoating amounts (g/m²). With respect to silver halide emulsions, thecoating amount is in terms of silver.

[0582] Support

[0583] Polyethylene resin-laminated paper

[0584] [The polyethylene resin on the first layer side contained a whitepigment (TiO₂, content of 16 mass %; ZnO, content of 4 mass %), afluorescent whitening agent (4,4′-bis(5-methylbenzoxazolyl)stilbene,content of 0.03 mass %) and a bluish dye (ultramarine, content of 0.33mass %). The amount of the polyethylene resin was 29.2 g/m²] First Layer(Blue-Sensitive Emulsion Layer) Silver iodobromochloride emulsion 0.16(gold-sulfur sensitized cubes, a 5:5 mixture of the large-size emulsionB-H and the small-size emulsion B-L (in terms of mol of silver)) Gelatin1.43 Yellow coupler (Exemplified Compound (6)) 0.34 Solvent (Solv-4)0.34 Solvent (Solv-9) 0.34 Second Layer (Color-Mixing Inhibiting Layer)Gelatin 0.78 Color-mixing inhibitor (Cpd-4) 0.06 Color-image stabilizer(Cpd-5) 0.006 Color-image stabilizer (Cpd-6) 0.05 Color-image stabilizer(Cpd-7) 0.006 Color-image stabilizer (UV-A) 0.06 Solvent (Solv-1) 0.06Solvent (Solv-2) 0.06 Solvent (Solv-5) 0.07 Solvent (Solv-8) 0.07 ThirdLayer (Green-Sensitive Emulsion Layer) Silver iodobromochloride emulsion0.12 (gold-sulfur sensitized cubes, a 1:3 mixture of the large-sizeemulsion M-H and the small-size emulsion M-L (in terms of mol ofsilver)) Gelatin 0.95 Magenta coupler (ExM) 0.12 Ultraviolet absorbingagent (UV-A) 0.03 Color-image stabilizer (Cpd-2) 0.01 Color-imagestabilizer (Cpd-6) 0.08 Color-image stabilizer (Cpd-7) 0.005 Color-imagestabilizer (Cpd-8) 0.01 Color-image stabilizer (Cpd-9) 0.01 Color-imagestabilizer (Cpd-10) 0.005 Color-image stabilizer (Cpd-11) 0.0001Color-image stabilizer (Cpd-20) 0.01 Solvent (Solv-3) 0.06 Solvent(Solv-4) 0.12 Solvent (Solv-6) 0.05 Solvent (Solv-9) 0.16 Fourth Layer(Color-Mixing Inhibiting Layer) Gelatin 0.65 Color-mixing inhibitor(Cpd-4) 0.05 Color-image stabilizer (Cpd-5) 0.005 Color-image stabilizer(Cpd-6) 0.04 Color-image stabilizer (Cpd-7) 0.005 Color-image stabilizer(UV-A) 0.05 Solvent (Solv-1) 0.05 Solvent (Solv-2) 0.05 Solvent (Solv-5)0.06 Solvent (Solv-8) 0.06 Fifth Layer (Red-Sensitive Emulsion Layer)Silver iodobromochloride emulsion 0.10 (gold-sulfur sensitized cubes, a4:6 mixture of the large-size emulsion C-H and the small-size emulsionC-L (in terms of mol of silver)) Gelatin 1.11 Cyan coupler (ExC-1) 0.11Cyan coupler (ExC-2) 0.01 Cyan coupler (ExC-3) 0.04 Color-imagestabilizer (Cpd-1) 0.03 Color-image stabilizer (Cpd-7) 0.01 Color-imagestabilizer (Cpd-9) 0.04 Color-image stabilizer (Cpd-10) 0.001Color-image stabilizer (Cpd-14) 0.001 Color-image stabilizer (Cpd-15)0.18 Color-image stabilizer (Cpd-16) 0.002 Color-image stabilizer(Cpd-17) 0.001 Color-image stabilizer (Cpd-18) 0.05 Color-imagestabilizer (Cpd-19) 0.04 Color-image stabilizer (UV-5) 0.10 Solvent(Solv-5) 0.19 Sixth Layer (Ultraviolet Absorbing Layer) Gelatin 0.34Ultraviolet absorbing agent (UV-B) 0.24 Compound (S1-4) 0.0015 Solvent(Solv-7) 0.11 Seventh Layer (Protective Layer) Gelatin 0.82 Additive(Cpd-22) 0.03 Liquid paraffin 0.02 Surface-active agent (Cpd-13) 0.02

[0585]

[0586] Samples 1102 to 1110 were prepared in the same manner as in thethus-prepared Sample 1101, except that the composition of the firstlayer was changed as shown below.

[0587] Samples 1102 to 1110 were prepared in the same manner as Sample1101, except for further adding the compound, as shown in Table 2, tothe first layer. The alkenylcarbonyl-series compound was added to thefirst layer in an amount of 0.15 g/m². When adding these compounds, eachsample was prepared in such a reduced amount of solvent that oil-solublecontents in the first layer would be a prescribed amount.

[0588] Processing Process

[0589] Each of the above photosensitive materials was processed into aform of a roll with a width of 127 mm, and the resultant samples wereexposed with a standard photographic image, by using Digital Mini LabFRONTIER 330 (trade name, manufactured by Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd.).Thereafter, a continuous processing (running test) was performed untilthe volume of the color-developer replenisher used in the followingprocessing step became twice the volume of the color-developer tank. Thefollowing processing and test were conducted, using this runningprocessing solution. Replenishment Processing step Temperature Timerate* Color development 45.0° C. 18 sec  45 ml Bleach-fixing 40.0° C. 18sec  35 ml Rinse (1) 45.0° C. 5 sec — Rinse (2) 45.0° C. 3 sec — Rinse(3)** 45.0° C. 3 sec — Rinse (4)** 45.0° C. 5 sec 121 ml  Drying   80°C. 15 sec  # The permeated water obtained in that tank was supplied tothe rinse (4), and the concentrated water was returned to the rinse (3).Pump pressure was controlled such that the permeated water in thereverse osmosis module would be maintained in an amount of 50 to 300ml/min, and the rinse solution was circulated under controlledtemperature for 10

[0590] (Tank solution) (Replenisher) (Color developer) Water 800 ml 800ml Fluorescent whitening agent (FL-3) 4.0 g 8.0 g Residual colorreducing agent (SR-1) 3.0 g 5.5 g Triisopropanolamine 8.8 g 8.8 g Sodiump-toluenesulfonate 10.0 g 10.0 g Ethylenediamine tetraacetic acid 4.0 g4.0 g Sodium sulfite 0.10 g 0.10 g Potassium chloride 10.0 g — Sodium4,5-dihydroxybenzene-1,3-disulfonate 0.50 g 0.50 gDisodium-N,N-bis(sulfonatoethyl)hydroxylamine 8.5 g 14.0 g4-amino-3-methyl-N-ethyl-N-(β-methanesulfonamidoethyl)aniline · sulfate· monohydrate 7.0 g 19.0 g Potassium carbonate 26.3 g 26.3 g Water tomake 1000 ml 1000 ml pH (25° C., adjusted using sulfuric acid and KOH)10.25 12.6 (Bleach-fixing solution) Water 800 ml 800 ml Ammoniumthiosulfate (750 g/l) 107 ml 214 ml Succinic acid 29.5 g 59.0 g Ammoniumiron (III) ethylenediaminetetraacetate 47.0 g 94.0 gEthylenediaminetetraacetic acid 1.4 g 2.8 g Nitric acid (67%) 17.5 g35.0 g Imidazole 14.6 g 29.2 g Ammonium sulfite 16.0 g 32.0 g Potassiummetabisulfite 23.1 g 46.2 g Water to make 1000 ml 1000 ml pH (25° C.,adjusted using nitric acid and aqueous ammonia) 6.00 6.00 (Rinsesolution) Sodium chlorinated-isocyanurate 0.02 g 0.02 g Deionized water(conductivity: 5 μS/cm or less) 1000 ml 1000 ml pH (25° C.) 6.5 6.5

[0591] After being coated, the photosensitive material Samples 1101 to1110 were kept for 10 days under conditions of 25° C. and 55% relativehumidity, followed by the evaluation set forth below.

[0592] (Evaluation: Fastness to Light)

[0593] Each sample was subjected to color-development processing in theabove-described processing process.

[0594] As light sources, a semiconductor laser was used to obtain alight source at 688 nm (R light), a semiconductor laser was combinedwith SHG to obtain a light source at 532 nm (G light), and a lightsource at 473 nm (B light). The quantity of light of R light wasmodulated with using an outer modulator, and scanning exposure wasperformed to a sample moving in a direction orthogonal to the scanningdirection, by reflecting these lights on a rotating polygon. Thescanning exposure was performed at the density of 400 dpi, and theaverage exposure time per 1 pixel was 8×10⁻⁸ sec. The temperature of thesemiconductor lasers was kept constant, with using a Peltier element, toprevent the quantity of light from being changed by temperature.

[0595] Using the samples processed by the above-described processingprocess, densitometry was conducted before and after exposure to a Xenonlamp of 100,000 lux for 14 days. The surface temperature of thephotosensitive materials was adjusted to become 50° C. A relativeresidual rate (%) after storage was calculated for a yellowcolor-developing area of an initial density of 0.3.

[0596] The results are shown in Table 2. TABLE 2 Inhibitor(alkenylcarbonyl- Microhardness Relative residual Sample No. Couplersereis compound) (N/mm²) rate (%) Remarks 1101 (6) — — 10 Comparativeexample 1102 (6) (B-47) 251 25 This invention 1103 (6) (B-48) 72 20 Thisinvention 1104 (6) DPCA 20 192 52 This invention 1105 (6) DPCA 30 154 52This invention 1106 (6) DPCA 60 92 51 This invention 1107 (6) DPHA 31244 This invention 1108 (6) D-310 333 44 This invention 1109 (6) A- I 10840 This invention 1110 (6) A- II 20 42 This invention

[0597] As is apparent from the results in Table 2, the Samples 1102 to1110 according to the present invention containing thealkenylcarbonyl-series compound defined in the present invention wereremarkably improved in light fastness, compared to Sample 1101containing no alkenylcarbonyl-series compound. In particular, among theSamples accoring to the present invention, the samples containing thecompound of microhardness value of 200 or less when forming apolimerized film, such as DPCA 20, DPCA 30, DPCA 60, were particularlyremarkably improved.

Example 1-2

[0598] Any of the compounds used in Samples 1102 to 1110 in Example 1-1was added to the third layer of Sample 1101, in an equivalent coatingamount of the compound per m², to prepare corresponding samples,respectively. When adding these compounds, each sample was prepared insuch a reduced amount of solvent that oil-soluble contents in the thirdlayer would be a prescribed amount.

[0599] After the thus-prepared samples were exposed to light andprocessed in the same manner as in Example 1-1, light fastness of thesesamples was evaluated in the same manner as in Example 1-1. In thiscase, a relative residual rate for a magenta dye-developing area wascalculated.

[0600] The samples containing the compound defined in the presentinvention in the third layer (magenta color-forming layer) were alsoimproved in light fastness, as well as the samples in Example 1-1.

Example 1-3

[0601] Any of the compounds used in Samples 1102 to 1110 in Example 1-1was added to the fifth layer of Sample 1101, in an equivalent coatingamount of the compound per m², to prepare corresponding samples,respectively. When adding these compounds, each sample was prepared insuch a reduced amount of solvent that oil-soluble contents in the fifthlayer would be a prescribed amount.

[0602] After the thus-prepared samples were exposed to light andprocessed in the same manner as in Example 1-1, light fastness of thesesamples was evaluated in the same manner as in Example 1-1. In thiscase, a relative residual rate for a cyan dye-developing area wascalculated.

[0603] The samples containing the compound defined in the presentinvention in the fifth layer (cyan color-forming layer) were alsoimproved in light fastnesss, as well as the samples in Example 1-1.

Example 2-1

[0604] (Preparation of Sample 2001)

[0605] Sample 2001 was prepared in the same manner as in theabove-mentioned preparation of Sample 1101 in Example 1-1, except thatthe compositions of the first and third layers were changed as shownbelow, and further that a mixture comprising the compound having 3 to 8recurring units represented by Compound X-1 (X₁₁ is a hydroxyl group,and X₁₂ is a 4-hydroxy-6-(2-hydroxyethyl)amino-1,3,5-triazine-2-ylgroup) and the compound having 2 and 3 recurring units represented byCompound X-2 was added to the first layer, in an amount of 150 mg permol of the silver halide in the first layer. First Layer (Blue-SensitiveEmulsion Layer) Silver iodobromochloride emulsion 0.16 (gold-sulfursensitized cubes, a 5:5 mixture of the large-size emulsion B-H and thesmall-size emulsion B-L (in terms of mol of silver)) Gelatin 1.32 Yellowcoupler (Exemplified Compound (6)) 0.34 Color-image stabilizer (Cpd-1)0.01 Color-image stabilizer (Cpd-2) 0.01 Color-image stabilizer (Cpd-8)0.08 Color-image stabilizer (Cpd-18) 0.01 Color-image stabilizer(Cpd-19) 0.02 Color-image stabilizer (Cpd-20) 0.15 Color-imagestabilizer (Cpd-21) 0.01 Cyan coupler (ExC-1) 0.001 Color-imagestabilizer (UV-2) 0.01 Solvent (Solv-4) 0.17 Solvent (Solv-6) 0.04Solvent (Solv-9) 0.17 Third Layer (Green-Sensitive Emulsion Layer)Silver iodobromochloride emulsion 0.12 (gold-sulfur sensitized cubes, a1:3 mixture of the large-size emulsion M-H and the small-size emulsionM-L (in terms of mol of silver)) Gelatin 0.95 Magenta coupler (ExM) 0.12Ultraviolet absorbing agent (UV-A) 0.03 Color-image stabilizer (Cpd-2)0.01 Color-image stabilizer (Cpd-4) 0.01 Color-image stabilizer (Cpd-6)0.08 Color-image stabilizer (Cpd-7) 0.005 Color-image stabilizer (Cpd-8)0.01 Color-image stabilizer (Cpd-9) 0.01 Color-image stabilizer (Cpd-10)0.005 Color-image stabilizer (Cpd-11) 0.0001 Color-image stabilizer(Cpd-20) 0.01 Solvent (Solv-3) 0.06 Solvent (Solv-4) 0.12 Solvent(Solv-6) 0.05 Solvent (Solv-9) 0.16

[0606] Sample 2101 was prepared in the same manner as in theabove-mentioned preparation of Sample 2001, except that the compositionof the first layer was changed as shown below. Composition of the FirstLayer (Blue-Sensitive Emulsion Layer) of Sample 2101 First Layer(Blue-Sensitive Emulsion Layer) Silver iodobromochloride emulsion 0.17(gold-sulfur sensitized cubes, a 5:5 mixture of the large-size emulsionB-H and the small-size emulsion B-L (in terms of mol of silver)) Gelatin1.43 Yellow coupler (Exemplified Compound (6)) 0.34 Solvent (Solv-4)0.34 Solvent (Solv-9) 0.34

[0607] Samples 2102 to 2121 were prepared in the same manner as Sample2101, except for further adding the compound(s), as shown in Table 3, tothe first layer. The alkenylcarbonyl-series compound was added to thefirst layer in an amount of 0.15 g/m². The addition amount of thecompound represented by formula (Ph) was set to be 70 mol % based on thedye-forming coupler. When adding these compounds, each sample wasprepared in such a reduced amount of solvent that oil-soluble contentsin the first layer would be a prescribed amount.

[0608] The aforementioned photosensitive materials were processed into aroll with a width of 127 mm, and then a standard photographic image wasexposed on the photosensitive materials by means of Digital Mini-LabFRONTIER 330 (trade name, manufactured by Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd.).Thereafter, using the exposed photosensitive materials, a continuousprocessing (running test) was conducted until the replenisher volume ofthe color developer used in the processing process set forth belowbecame twice the volume of the color developer tank. Two kinds ofprocessing in which both the composition of processing solutions and theprocess time were different from each other were carried out, toevaluate photosensitive materials.

[0609] Processing Process A

[0610] The processing using the following running processing solutionwas named Processing A. Replenishment Processing step Temperature Timerate* Color development 38.5° C. 45 sec 45 ml Bleach-fixing 38.0° C. 45sec 35 ml Rinse (1) 38.0° C. 20 sec — Rinse (2) 38.0° C. 20 sec — Rinse(3)** 38.0° C. 20 sec — Rinse (4)** 38.0° C. 20 sec 121 ml  Drying   80°C. # rinse (4), and the concentrated liquid was returned to the rinse(3). Pump pressure was controlled such that the permeated water in thereverse osmosis module would be maintained in an amount of 50 to 300ml/min, and the rinse solution was circulated under controlledtemperature for 10 hours a day. The rinse was made in a four-tankcounter-current system from (1) to (4).

[0611] The composition of each processing solution was as follows. (Tanksolution) (Replenisher) (Color developer) Water 800 ml 800 mlFluorescent whitening agent 2.2 g 5.1 g (FL-1) Fluorescent whiteningagent 0.35 g 1.75 g (FL-2) Triisopropanolamine 8.8 g 8.8 gPolyethyleneglycol 10.0 g 10.0 g (Average molecular weight: 300)Ethylenediamine tetraacetic acid 4.0 g 4.0 g Sodium sulfite 0.10 g 0.20g Potassium chloride 10.0 g — Sodium 4,5-dihydroxybenzene- 0.50 g 0.50 g1,3-disulfonate Disodium-N,N-bis(sulfonatoethyl) 8.5 g 14.0 ghydroxylamine 4-Amino-3-methyl-N-ethyl-N- 4.8 g 14.0 g(β-methanesulfonamidoethyl) aniline · 3/2 sulfate-monohydrate Potassiumcarbonate 26.3 g 26.3 g Water to make 1000 ml 1000 ml pH (25° C.,adjusted using 10.15 sulfuric acid and KOH) (Bleach-fixing solution)Water 800 ml 800 ml Ammonium thiosulfate 107 ml 214 ml (750 g/l)m-Carboxybenzenesulfinic 8.3 g 16.5 g acid Ammonium iron (III) 47.0 g94.0 g ethylenediamine tetraacetate Ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid 1.4g 2.8 g Nitric acid (67%) 16.5 g 33.0 g Imidazole 14.6 g 29.2 g Ammoniumsulfite 16.0 g 32.0 g Potassium metabisulfite 23.1 g 46.2 g Water tomake 1000 ml 1000 ml pH (25° C., adjusted using 6.5 6.5 nitric acid andaqueous ammonia) (Rinse solution) Sodium chlorinated-isocyanurate 0.02 g0.02 g Deionized water 1000 ml 1000 ml (conductivity: 5 μS/cm or less)pH (25° C.) 6.5 6.5

[0612] Processing Process B

[0613] The above photosensitive material samples were processed into aform of a roll with a width of 127 mm, and the photosensitive materialwas exposed with a standard photographic image, by using Digital MiniLab FRONTIER 330 (trade name) manufactured by Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd.Thereafter, a continuous processing (running test) was performed untilthe volume of the color-developer replenisher used in the followingprocessing step became twice the volume of the color-developer tank. Theprocessing using this running processing solution was named processingB. Processing step Temperature Time Replenishment rate* Colordevelopment 45.0° C. 18 sec  45 ml Bleach-fixing 40.0° C. 18 sec  35 mlRinse (1) 45.0° C. 5 sec — Rinse (2) 45.0° C. 3 sec — Rinse (3)** 45.0°C. 3 sec — Rinse (4)** 45.0° C. 5 sec 121 ml  Drying   80° C. 15 sec  #concentrated water was returned to the rinse (3). Pump pressure wascontrolled such that the permeated water in the reverse osmosis modulewould be maintained in an amount of 50 to 300 ml/min, and the rinsesolution was circulated under controlled temperature for 10 hours a day.The rinse was made in a four-tank counter-current system from (1) to(4).

[0614] The composition of each processing solution was as follows. (Tanksolution) (Replenisher) (Color developer) Water 800 ml 800 mlFluorescent whitening agent 4.0 g 8.0 g (FL-3) Residual color reducingagent 3.0 g 5.5 g (SR-1) Triisopropanolamine 8.8 g 8.8 g Sodiump-toluenesulfonate 10.0 g 10.0 g Ethylenediamine tetraacetic acid 4.0 g4.0 g Sodium sulfite 0.10 g 0.10 g Potassium chloride 10.0 g — Sodium4,5-dihydroxybenzene 0.50 g 0.50 g -1,3-disulfonateDisodium-N,N-bis(sulfonatoethyl) 8.5 g 14.0 g hydroxylamine4-amino-3-methyl-N-ethyl-N- 7.0 g 19.0 g(β-methanesulfonamidoethyl)aniline · 3/2 sulfate · monohydrate Potassiumcarbonate 26.3 g 26.3 g Water to make 1000 ml 1000 ml pH (25° C.,adjusted using sulfuric 10.25 12.6 acid and KOH) (Bleach-fixingsolution) Water 800 ml 800 ml Ammonium thiosulfate (750 g/l) 107 ml 214ml Succinic acid 29.5 g 59.0 g Ammonium iron (III) 47.0 g 94.0 gethylenediaminetetraacetate Ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid 1.4 g 2.8 gNitric acid (67%) 17.5 g 35.0 g Imidazole 14.6 g 29.2 g Ammonium sulfite16.0 g 32.0 g Potassium metabisulfite 23.1 g 46.2 g Water to make 1000ml 1000 ml pH (25° C., adjusted using nitric 6.00 6.00 acid and aqueousammonia) (Rinse solution) Sodium chlorinated-isocyanurate 0.02 g 0.02 gDeionized water 1000 ml 1000 ml (conductivity: 5 (μS/cm or less) pH (25°C.) 6.5 6.5

[0615] After being coated, the photosensitive material Samples 2101 to2121 were kept for 10 days under conditions of 25° C. and 55% relativehumidity, followed by the evaluation set forth below.

[0616] (Evaluation 1: Fastness to Light)

[0617] Each sample was subjected to exposure necessary to give a gray inthe above-described processing process B, followed by color-developmentprocessing in the above-described processing processes A and B.

[0618] As light sources, a semiconductor laser was used to obtain alight source at 688 nm (R light), a semiconductor laser was combinedwith SHG to obtain a light source at 532 nm (G light), and a lightsource at 473 nm (B light). The quantity of light of R light wasmodulated with using an outer modulator, and scanning exposure wasperformed to a sample moving in a direction orthogonal to the scanningdirection, by reflecting these lights on a rotating polygon. Thescanning exposure was performed at the density of 400 dpi and theaverage exposure time per 1 pixel was 8×10⁻⁸ sec. The temperature of thesemiconductor lasers was kept constant, with using a Peltier element, toprevent the quantity of light from being changed by temperature.

[0619] Each sample was subjected to light exposure, so that an overlapbetween each rasters became ⅓.

[0620] The value of ΔDmax(=DA−DB) of each sample was caluculated. Inthis connection, “DA” means a density at a maximum color density portionfor yellow when the light-sensitive material was processed by theprocessing process A, while “DB” means a density at a maximum colordensity portion for yellow when the light-sensitive material wasprocessed by the processing process B.

[0621] The value of ΔDmax of each sample is shown in Table 3.

[0622] Using the samples processed by the above-described processingprocesses A and B, densitometry was conducted before and after exposureto a Xenon lamp of 100,000 lux for 14 days. The surface temperature ofthe photosensitive materials was adjusted to become 50° C. A relativeresidual rate (%) after storage was calculated for a yellowcolor-forming area of an initial density of 0.3.

[0623] The results obtained by evaluating the samples processedaccording to the processing process B are shown in Table 3. Further, thesamples processed according to the processing process A showedessentially the same results as the samples processed according to theprocessing process B. TABLE 3 Inhibitor Relative Sample(alkenylcarbonyl- Microhardness Compound of residual rate No. Couplersereis compound) (N/mm²) formula (Ph) (%) ΔDmax Remarks 2101 (6) — — —10 0.1 Comparative example 2102 (6) — — Ph-A50 35 0.35 Comparativeexample 2103 (6) (B-47) 251 — 25 0.2 This invention 2104 (6) (B-48) 72 —20 0.1 This invention 2105 (6) DPCA 20 192 — 52 0.1 This invention 2106(6) DPCA 30 154 — 52 0.1 This invention 2107 (6) DPCA 60 92 — 51 0.1This invention 2108 (6) DPHA 312 — 44 0.1 This invention 2109 (6) D-310333 — 44 0.1 This invention 2110 (6) A- I 107.9 — 40 0.1 This invention2111 (6) A- II 20.4 — 42 0.1 This invention 2112 (6) DPCA 20 192 Ph-A1070 0.1 This invention 2113 (6) DPCA 30 154 Ph-A10 70 0.1 This invention2114 (6) DPCA 60 92 Ph-A10 69 0.1 This invention 2115 (6) DPHA 312Ph-A10 60 0.1 This invention 2116 (6) D-310 333 Ph-A10 60 0.1 Thisinvention 2117 (6) A- I 107.9 Ph-A10 55 0.1 This invention 2118 (6) A-II 20.4 Ph-A10 57 0.1 This invention 2119 (6) DPCA 30 154 Ph-A6 67 0.1This invention 2120 (6) DPCA 30 154 Ph-A53 62 0.1 This invention 2121(6) DPCA 30 154 Ph-A60 62 0.1 This invention

[0624] It can be seen, from the results in Table 3, that the Samples towhich the alkenylcarbonyl-series compound was added exhibited effects ofremarkably improving light fastness, compared to the Sample containingno alkenylcarbonyl-series compound. It can be seen, from a comparison,for example, between Samples 2103 to 2104 and 2105 to 2107, and Samples2108 to 2109 and 2110 to 2111, that the Samples containing, amongvarious compounds, the compound represented formula (A) and having amicrohardness value of 200 or less when forming a polimerized film, suchas DPCA 20, DPCA 30, or DPCA 60, exhibited effects of particularlyremarkable improvement in light fastness. It can be also seen, from acomparison, for example, between Samples 2105 to 2111 and Samples 2112to 2121, that light fastness is furthermore remarkably improved byfurther addition of the compound represented by formula (Ph).

Example 2-2

[0625] Samples 2201 to 2221 were prepared in the same manner as Samples2112 to 2118 prepared in Example 2-1, except for further adding thecompounds to the first layer, as shown in Table 4. The amount of theadditional compounds was to achieve 20 mol % of the coupler,respectively. In this addition of the additional compounds, each samplewas prepared in such a reduced amount of solvent that oil-solublecontents in the first layer would be a prescribed amount.

[0626] Similarly to Example 2-1, each sample was subjected to exposureto light and a development process, and light fastness was evaluated inthe same manner as in Example 2-1. The results obtained are shown inTable 4. TABLE 4 Inhibitor Relative Sample (alkenylcarbonyl- Compound ofCompound of formula residual rate No. Coupler sereis compound) formula(Ph) (E-1), (E-2) or (E-3) (%) Remarks 2112 (6) DPCA 20 Ph-A10 — 70 Thisinvention 2201 (6) DPCA 20 Ph-A10 EB-9 81 This invention 2202 (6) DPCA20 Ph-A10 EB-7 79 This invention 2203 (6) DPCA 20 Ph-A10 EB-8 77 Thisinvention 2113 (6) DPCA 30 Ph-A10 — 70 This invention 2204 (6) DPCA 30Ph-A10 EB-9 81 This invention 2205 (6) DPCA 30 Ph-A10 EB-7 79 Thisinvention 2206 (6) DPCA 30 Ph-A10 EB-8 77 This invention 2114 (6) DPCA60 Ph-A10 — 69 This invention 2207 (6) DPCA 60 Ph-A10 EB-9 80 Thisinvention 2208 (6) DPCA 60 Ph-A10 EB-7 78 This invention 2209 (6) DPCA60 Ph-A10 EB-8 76 This invention 2115 (6) DPHA Ph-A10 — 60 Thisinvention 2210 (6) DPHA Ph-A10 EB-9 71 This invention 2211 (6) DPHAPh-A10 EB-7 69 This invention 2212 (6) DPHA Ph-A10 EB-8 67 Thisinvention 2116 (6) D-310 Ph-A10 — 60 This invention 2213 (6) D-310Ph-A10 EB-9 71 This invention 2214 (6) D-310 Ph-A10 EB-7 69 Thisinvention 2215 (6) D-310 Ph-A10 EB-8 67 This invention 2117 (6) A- IPh-A10 — 55 This invention 2216 (6) A- I Ph-A10 EB-9 66 This invention2217 (6) A- I Ph-A10 EB-7 67 This invention 2218 (6) A- I Ph-A10 EB-8 65This invention 2118 (6) A- II Ph-A10 — 57 This invention 2219 (6) A- IIPh-A10 EB-9 68 This invention 2220 (6) A- II Ph-A10 EB-7 66 Thisinvention 2221 (6) A- II Ph-A10 EB-8 64 This invention

[0627] The results in Table 4 clearly show that supplementary additionof the compound represented by any one of formulae (E-1) to (E-3)further improved image fastness.

Example 2-3

[0628] Samples 2301 to 2314 were prepared in the same manner as sample2204 in Example 2-2, except that the respective compound, set forth inTable 5, was additionally incorporated in the first layer. The amount ofthe additional compound was to be 20 mol % to the coupler, respectively.In this addition of the additional compounds, each sample was preparedin such a reduced amount of solvent that oil-soluble contents in thefirst layer would be a prescribed amount. The compound represented byP-2 was added in the proportion of 0.05 g in the above composition ofthe first layer (blue-sensitive emulsion layer) of Sample 2101.

[0629] Similarly to Example 2-1, each sample was subjected to exposureto light, and a development processing, and fastness to light wasevaluated in the same manner as in Example 2-1. The results aresummarized in Table 5. TABLE 5 Inhibitor Relative Sample(alkenylcarbonyl- Compound of Compound of formula Other residual rateNo. Coupler sereis compound) formula (Ph) (E-1), (E-2) or (E-3)inhibitor (%) Remarks 2204 (6) DPCA 30 Ph-A10 EB-9 — 81 This invention2301 (6) DPCA 30 Ph-A10 EB-9 TI-5 85 This invention 2302 (6) DPCA 30Ph-A10 EB-9 TII-9 85 This invention 2303 (6) DPCA 30 Ph-A10 EB-9 TIII-884 This invention 2304 (6) DPCA 30 Ph-A10 EB-9 TIV-8 85 This invention2305 (6) DPCA 30 Ph-A10 EB-9 TV-2 84 This invention 2306 (6) DPCA 30Ph-A10 EB-9 TVI-2 84 This invention 2307 (6) DPCA 30 Ph-A10 EB-9 TVII-184 This invention 2308 (6) DPCA 30 Ph-A10 EB-9 UA-2 85 This invention2309 (6) DPCA 30 Ph-A10 EB-9 UB-3 85 This invention 2310 (6) DPCA 30Ph-A10 EB-9 UC-1 85 This invention 2311 (6) DPCA 30 Ph-A10 EB-9 UD-3 85This invention 2312 (6) DPCA 30 Ph-A10 EB-9 UE-1 86 This invention 2313(6) DPCA 30 Ph-A10 EB-9 P-2 84 This invention 2314 (6) DPCA 30 Ph-A10EB-9 TI-5 87 This invention TII-9 UA-2

[0630] The results shown in Table 5 clearly show that supplementaryaddition of one or more of: the metal complex, the ultraviolet absorbingagent, the water-insoluble homopolymer or copolymer, and the compound,represented by any one of formulae (TS-I) to (TS-VII), further improvedimage fastness.

Example 2-4

[0631] Samples 2401 to 2406 were prepared in the same manner as Sample2314 in Example 2-3, except that the kind of the coupler in the firstlayer was changed, as shown in Table 6. Photographic properties of thesamples were evaluated in the same manner as in Example 2-1, except forchanging the processing process B in Evaluation 1 to the processingprocess A. The results obtained by evaluation of light fastness areshown in Table 6. TABLE 6 Relative residual Sample No. Coupler rate (%)2314  (6) 87 2401  (7) 80 2402  (8) 83 2403 (17) 78 2404 (19) 71 2405(21) 65 2406 (22) 62

[0632] It can be seen that the samples using couplers, in which thestructure of the coupler had an alkylthio group or an arylthio group atthe ortho-position to the —CONH— group, were excellent in fastness tolight. Among them, the samples using couplers, in which the structure ofthe coupler had an alkylthio group at the ortho-position to the —CONH—group, were more excellent in fastness to light. Moreover, the sampleusing the coupler, in which the structure of the coupler also had at-butyl group at the para-position to the alkylthio group, was even moreexcellent in fastness to light.

Example 2-5

[0633] Samples were prepared in the same manner as samples 2101 to 2121in Example 2-1, Samples 2201 to 2221 in Example 2-2, Samples 2301 to2314 in Example 2-3, and Samples 2401 to 2406 in Example 2-4, exceptthat the support to be coated was replaced with a PET reflection supportof 175 μm thickness, in which PET was kneaded with barium sulfate. Anevaluation according to Example 2-1 was carried out, and essentially thesame results as Examples 2-1 to 2-4 were obtained.

Example 2-6

[0634] Samples 2101 to 2121 in Example 2-1, Samples 2201 to 2221 inExample 2-2, Samples 2301 to 2314 in Example 2-3, and Samples 2401 to2406 in Example 2-4 were scan-exposed by means of each exposureapparatus set forth below. An evaluation according to Example 2-1 wasconducted. The thus-obtained results demonstrate that each sampleaccording to the present invention exhibited the effects of theinvention of excellent fastness to light and processing stability,regardless of the kind of exposure apparatus used.

[0635] Exposure Apparatus

[0636] Digital Mini-Lab FRONTIER 330 (trade name, manufactured by FujiPhoto Film Co., Ltd.)

[0637] Lambda 130 (trade name, manufactured by Durst Co.)

[0638] LIGHTJET 5000 (trade name, manufactured by Gretag Co.)

Example 2-7

[0639] Samples were prepared in the same manner as the samples inExamples 2-1, 2-2 and 2-3, except for changing the composition as setforth below.

[0640] Coating amount of the blue-sensitive silver halide

[0641] emulsion layer: 240%

[0642] Coating amount of the green-sensitive silver halide

[0643] emulsion layer: 250%

[0644] Coating amount of the red-sensitive silver halide

[0645] emulsion layer: 260%

[0646] Support: 180 μm thick polyethylene terephthalate

[0647] transparent support

[0648] Each of these samples was processed according to processingprocess B in Example 2-1, except that, in this processing process, eachof the processing steps was prolonged by 2.7 times. The same evaluationas in Example 2-1 was conducted. The thus-obtained results demonstratethat use of the yellow coupler and the additive(s) for use in thepresent invention, in combination, gave photosensitive materialsexcellent in image fastness.

Example 3-1

[0649] (Preparation of Sample 3001)

[0650] Sample 3001 was prepared in the same manner as in theabove-mentioned preparation of Sample 2001 in Example 2-1, except thatthe composition of the first layer was changed as shown below. FirstLayer (Blue-Sensitive Emulsion Layer) Silver iodobromochloride emulsion(gold-sulfur 0.16 sensitized cubes, a 5:5 mixture of the large-sizeemulsion B-H and the small-size emulsion B-L (in terms of mol ofsilver)) Gelatin 1.32 Yellow coupler (Exemplified compound (106)) 0.34Color-image stabilizer (Cpd-1) 0.01 Color-image stabilizer (Cpd-2) 0.01Color-image stabilizer (Cpd-8) 0.08 Color-image stabilizer (Cpd-18) 0.01Color-image stabilizer (Cpd-19) 0.02 Color-image stabilizer (Cpd-20)0.15 Color-image stabilizer (Cpd-21) 0.01 Cyan coupler (ExC-1) 0.001Color-image stabilizer (UV-2) 0.01 Solvent (Solv-4) 0.17 Solvent(Solv-6) 0.04 Solvent (Solv-9) 0.17

[0651] Sample 3101 was prepared in the same manner as in theabove-mentioned preparation of Sample 3001, except that the compositionof the first layer was changed as shown below. Composition of the FirstLayer (Blue-Sensitive Emulsion Layer) of Sample 3101 First Layer(Blue-Sensitive Emulsion Layer) Silver iodobromochloride emulsion(gold-sulfur 0.17 sensitized cubes, a 5:5 mixture of the large-sizeemulsion B-H and the small-size emulsion B-L (in terms of mol ofsilver)) Gelatin 1.43 Yellow coupler (Exemplified compound (102)) 0.34Solvent (Solv-4) 0.41 Solvent (Solv-9) 0.41

[0652] Samples 3102 to 3129 were prepared in the same manner as Sample3101, except for adding the compound shown in Table 7 to the firstlayer. The amount of the alkenylcarbonyl-series compound to be added wasset so as to become 0.15 g/m², to the composition of the first layer ofthe aforementioned Sample 3101. The addition amount of the compoundrepresented by formula (Ph) was set so as to become 70 mol % to thedye-forming coupler. When adding these compounds, each sample wasprepared in such a reduced amount of solvent that oil-soluble contentsin the first layer would be a prescribed amount.

[0653] After being coated, the photosensitive material Samples 3101 to3129 were kept for 10 days under conditions of 25° C. and 55% relativehumidity, followed by the evaluation set forth below.

[0654] Each sample was subjected to exposure necessary to give a gray inthe above-described processing process B, followed by color-developmentprocessing in the above-described processing processes A and B.

[0655] As light sources, a semiconductor laser was used to obtain alight source at 688 nm (R light), a semiconductor laser was combinedwith SHG to obtain a light source at 532 nm (G light), and a lightsource at 473 nm (B light). The quantity of light of R light wasmodulated with using an outer modulator, and scanning exposure wasperformed to a sample moving in a direction orthogonal to the scanningdirection, by reflecting these lights on a rotating polygon. Thescanning exposure was performed at the density of 400 dpi and theaverage exposure time per 1 pixel was 8×10⁻⁸ sec. The temperature of thesemiconductor lasers was kept constant, with using a Peltier element, toprevent the quantity of light from being changed by temperature.

[0656] (Evaluation 3-1: Rapid-processing Property)

[0657] The value of ΔDmax(=DA−DB) of each sample was caluculated in thesame manner as in Example 2-1.

[0658] The value of ΔDmax of each sample is shown in Table 7.

[0659] (Evaluation 3-2: Fastness to Light)

[0660] Using the samples processed by the above-described processingprocesses A and B, densitometry was conducted before and after exposureto a Xenon lamp of 100,000 lux for 14 days. The surface temperature ofthe photosensitive materials was adjusted to become 50° C. A relativeresidual rate (%) after storage was calculated for a yellowcolor-developing area of an initial density of 0.3.

[0661] The results obtained by evaluating the samples processedaccording to processing process B are shown in Table 7. Further, thesamples processed according to processing process A showed essentiallythe same results as the samples processed according to processingprocess B.

[0662] (Evaluation 3-3: Raw Stock Storability)

[0663] After non-exposed photosensitive materials were stored (beingkept) for 3 days under conditions of temperature of 40° C. and humidityof 80%(RH), the resultant samples were exposed to light using theabove-mentioned method, followed by color-development processing in theabove-described processing process B. Yellow densities in the unexposedarea were measured before and after 3-day storage. The evaluation valueswere obtained in terms of the density after 3-day storage minus thedensity before 3-day storage (which indicate increase in yellow densityafter thermo-raw stock storability test). The results are shown in Table7. TABLE 7 Inhibitor Relative Increase in yellow Sample(alkenylcarbonyl- Compound of residual rate density after thermo- No.Coupler sereis compound) formula (Ph) (%) ΔDmax raw storage Remarks 3101(102) — — 27 0.1 0.008 Comparative example 3102 (102) — Ph-A50 42 0.350.011 Comparative example 3103 (102) B-3 — 52 0.1 0.001 This invention3104 (102) B-6 — 51 0.1 0.001 This invention 3105 (102) B-14 — 51 0.10.001 This invention 3106 (102) B-11 — 47 0.1 0.001 This invention 3107(102) B-18 — 57 0.1 0.001 This invention 3108 (102) B-19 — 57 0.1 0.001This invention 3109 (102) B-27 — 58 0.1 0.001 This invention 3110 (102)B-36 — 60 0.1 0.001 This invention 3111 (102) B-38 — 61 0.1 0.001 Thisinvention 3112 (102) B-42 — 64 0.1 0.001 This invention 3113 (102) B-44— 64 0.1 0.001 This invention 3114 (102) B-45 — 65 0.1 0.001 Thisinvention 3115 (102) B-3 Ph-A10 74 0.1 0.001 This invention 3116 (102)B-6 Ph-A10 73 0.1 0.001 This invention 3117 (102) B-14 Ph-A10 73 0.10.001 This invention 3118 (102) B-11 Ph-A10 69 0.1 0.001 This invention3119 (102) B-18 Ph-A10 79 0.1 0.001 This invention 3120 (102) B-19Ph-A10 79 0.1 0.001 This invention 3121 (102) B-27 Ph-A10 80 0.1 0.001This invention 3122 (102) B-36 Ph-A10 82 0.1 0.001 This invention 3123(102) B-38 Ph-A10 83 0.1 0.001 This invention 3124 (102) B-42 Ph-A10 860.1 0.001 This invention 3125 (102) B-44 Ph-A10 86 0.1 0.001 Thisinvention 3126 (102) B-45 Ph-A10 87 0.1 0.001 This invention 3127 (102)B-36 Ph-A6 79 0.1 0.001 This invention 3128 (102) B-36 Ph-A53 75 0.10.001 This invention 3129 (102) B-36 Ph-A60 75 0.1 0.001 This invention

[0664] It can be seen, from comparing, for example, Samples 3103 to 3114with Sample 3101, that addition of the alkenylcarbonyl-series compounddefined in the present invention, to the samples, enabled remarkableimprovement in light fastness, compared with the samples for comparisonfree of the compound. Further, it can be seen from comparing, forexample, Samples 3107 to 3114 and 3119 to 3126 with Samples 3103 to 3106and 3115 to 3118, that the compound defined in the above-described items(23) to (26) in which n1 was an integer of 2 to 4 in formula (B), amongthe compounds for use in the present invention, exhibited a particularlyexcellent light fastness.

[0665] Furthermore, it can be seen from comparing, for example, Samples3103 to 3114 with Samples 3115 to 3118, that addition of the compoundrepresented by formula (Ph), to the samples, enabled further remarkableimprovement in fastness.

[0666] It can be seen from comparing, for example, Samples 3103 to 3114with Sample 3101, that addition of the alkenylcarbonyl-series compounddefined in the present invention, to the samples, enabled to preventincrease in yellow density after raw stock reservation from occurring,compared with samples for comparison free of the compounds.

Example3-2

[0667] Samples 3201 to 3227 were prepared in the same manner as Samples3116, 3117, 3119, 3121, 3122, 3123, 3124, 3125 and 3126 in Example 3-1,except that the respective compound represented by any one of formulae(E-1) to (E-3), as shown in Table 8, was additionally incorporated inthe first layer. The compound represented by any one of formulae (E-1)to (E-3) was added in an amount to be 20 mol % based on the coupler.When adding these compounds, each sample was prepared using such areduced amount of solvent that oil-soluble contents in the first layerbecame a fixed quantity. TABLE 8 Inhibitor Compound of Relative Increasein yellow Sample (alkenylcarbonyl- Compound of formula (E-1), residualdensity after thermo- No. Coupler sereis compound) formula (Ph) (E-2) or(E-3) rate (%) raw storage Remarks 3116 (102) B-6 Ph-A10 — 73 0.001 Thisinvention 3201 (102) B-6 Ph-A10 EB-9 79 0.001 This invention 3202 (102)B-6 Ph-A10 EB-7 78 0.001 This invention 3203 (102) B-6 Ph-A10 EB-8 760.001 This invention 3117 (102) B-14 Ph-A10 — 73 0.001 This invention3204 (102) B-14 Ph-A10 EB-9 79 0.001 This invention 3205 (102) B-14Ph-A10 EB-7 78 0.001 This invention 3206 (102) B-14 Ph-A10 EB-8 76 0.001This invention 3119 (102) B-18 Ph-A10 — 79 0.001 This invention 3207(102) B-18 Ph-A10 EB-9 85 0.001 This invention 3208 (102) B-18 Ph-A10EB-7 84 0.001 This invention 3209 (102) B-18 Ph-A10 EB-8 82 0.001 Thisinvention 3121 (102) B-27 Ph-A10 — 80 0.001 This invention 3210 (102)B-27 Ph-A10 EB-9 86 0.001 This invention 3211 (102) B-27 Ph-A10 EB-7 850.001 This invention 3212 (102) B-27 Ph-A10 EB-8 83 0.001 This invention3122 (102) B-36 Ph-A10 — 82 0.001 This invention 3213 (102) B-36 Ph-A10EB-9 88 0.001 This invention 3214 (102) B-36 Ph-A10 EB-7 87 0.001 Thisinvention 3215 (102) B-36 Ph-A10 EB-8 85 0.001 This invention 3123 (102)B-38 Ph-A10 — 83 0.001 This invention 3216 (102) B-38 Ph-A10 EB-9 890.001 This invention 3217 (102) B-38 Ph-A10 EB-7 88 0.001 This invention3218 (102) B-38 Ph-A10 EB-8 86 0.001 This invention 3124 (102) B-42Ph-A10 — 86 0.001 This invention 3219 (102) B-42 Ph-A10 EB-9 92 0.001This invention 3220 (102) B-42 Ph-A10 EB-7 91 0.001 This invention 3221(102) B-42 Ph-A10 EB-8 89 0.001 This invention 3125 (102) B-44 Ph-A10 —86 0.001 This invention 3222 (102) B-44 Ph-A10 EB-9 92 0.001 Thisinvention 3223 (102) B-44 Ph-A10 EB-7 91 0.001 This invention 3224 (102)B-44 Ph-A10 EB-8 89 0.001 This invention 3126 (102) B-45 Ph-A10 — 870.001 This invention 3225 (102) B-45 Ph-A10 EB-9 93 0.001 This invention3226 (102) B-45 Ph-A10 EB-7 92 0.001 This invention 3227 (102) B-45Ph-A10 EB-8 90 0.001 This invention

[0668] Similarly to Example 3-1, each sample was subjected to exposureto light, and development processing, and fastness to light wasevaluated in the same manner as in Example 3-1.

[0669] The results in Table 8 clearly show that supplementary additionof the compound represented by any one of formulae (E-1) to (E-3)further improved image fastness. It is also seen that addition of any ofthese compounds did not cause increase in yellow density after raw stockstorage.

Example 3-3

[0670] Samples 3301 to 3328 were prepared in the same manner as Samples3213 and 3216 in Example 3-2, except that the respective otherinhibitor, as shown in Table 9, was additionally incorporated in thefirst layer. The amount of the other inhibitors except for Compoundrepresented by P-2 was added so as to become 20 mol % based on thecoupler. In this occasion, each sample was prepared using such a reducedamount of solvent that oil-soluble contents in the first layer became afixed quantity. The Compound represented by P-2 was added in theproportion of 0.05 g in the above composition of the first layer(blue-sensitive emulsion layer) of sample 3101. TABLE 9 Increase inyellow Inhibitor Compound of Relative density after Sample(alkenylcarbonyl- Compound of formula (E-1), Other residual thermo-rawNo. Coupler sereis compound) formula (Ph) (E-2) or (E-3) inhibitor rate(%) storage Remarks 3213 (102) B-36 Ph-A10 EB-9 — 88 0.001 Thisinvention 3301 (102) B-36 Ph-A10 EB-9 TI-5 92 0.001 This invention 3302(102) B-36 Ph-A10 EB-9 TII-9 92 0.001 This invention 3303 (102) B-36Ph-A10 EB-9 TIII-8 91 0.001 This invention 3304 (102) B-36 Ph-A10 EB-9TIV-8 92 0.001 This invention 3305 (102) B-36 Ph-A10 EB-9 TV-2 91 0.001This invention 3306 (102) B-36 Ph-A10 EB-9 TVI-2 91 0.001 This invention3307 (102) B-36 Ph-A10 EB-9 TVII-1 91 0.001 This invention 3308 (102)B-36 Ph-A10 EB-9 UA-2 92 0.001 This invention 3309 (102) B-36 Ph-A10EB-9 UB-3 91 0.001 This invention 3310 (102) B-36 Ph-A10 EB-9 UC-1 910.001 This invention 3311 (102) B-36 Ph-A10 EB-9 UD-3 91 0.001 Thisinvention 3312 (102) B-36 Ph-A10 EB-9 UE-1 92 0.001 This invention 3313(102) B-36 Ph-A10 EB-9 P-2 91 0.001 This invention 3314 (102) B-36Ph-A10 EB-9 TI-5 93 0.001 This invention TII-9 UA-2 3216 (102) B-38Ph-A10 EB-9 — 89 0.001 This invention 3315 (102) B-38 Ph-A10 EB-9 TI-593 0.001 This invention 3316 (102) B-38 Ph-A10 EB-9 TII-9 93 0.001 Thisinvention 3317 (102) B-38 Ph-A10 EB-9 TIII-8 92 0.001 This invention3318 (102) B-38 Ph-A10 EB-9 TIV-8 93 0.001 This invention 3319 (102)B-38 Ph-A10 EB-9 TV-2 92 0.001 This invention 3320 (102) B-38 Ph-A10EB-9 TVI-2 92 0.001 This invention 3321 (102) B-38 Ph-A10 EB-9 TVII-1 920.001 This invention 3322 (102) B-38 Ph-A10 EB-9 UA-2 93 0.001 Thisinvention 3323 (102) B-38 Ph-A10 EB-9 UB-3 92 0.001 This invention 3324(102) B-38 Ph-A10 EB-9 UC-1 92 0.001 This invention 3325 (102) B-38Ph-A10 EB-9 UD-3 92 0.001 This invention 3326 (102) B-38 Ph-A10 EB-9UE-1 93 0.001 This invention 3327 (102) B-38 Ph-A10 EB-9 P-2 92 0.001This invention 3328 (102) B-38 Ph-A10 EB-9 TI-5 94 0.001 This inventionTII-9 UA-2

[0671] Similarly to Example 3-1, each sample was subjected to exposureto light, and development processing, and fastness to light wasevaluated in the same manner as in Example 3-1.

[0672] The results in Table 9 clearly show that supplementary additionof one or more of: the metal complex, the ultraviolet absorbing agent,the water-insoluble homopolymer or copolymer, and the compound,represented by any one of formulae (TS-I) to (TS-VII), further improvedimage fastness. It is also seen that addition of any of these compoundsor additives did not cause increase in yellow density after stockstorage.

Example 3-4

[0673] Samples 3401 to 3403 were prepared in the same manner as Sample3314 prepared in Example 3-3, except that the kind of the coupler in thefirst layer was changed, as shown in Table 10. Photographic propertiesof the samples were evaluated in the same manner as in Example 3-1,except for changing the processing process B in Evaluation 3-2 to theprocessing process A. The results obtained by evaluation of lightfastness are shown in Table 10. TABLE 10 Increase in yellow densitySample Relative residual after thermo-raw No. Coupler rate (%) storage3314 (102) 93 0.001 3401 (104) 91 0.001 3402 (113) 92 0.001 3403 (122)90 0.001

[0674] It can be seen from the results shown in Table 10 that the yellowdye-forming couplers defined in the present invention, as well as theyellow dye-formiing coupler (102), exhibited excellent effects. It isalso seen that addition of any of these couplers did not cause increasein yellow density after stock storage.

Example 3-5

[0675] Samples were prepared in the same manner as Samples 3101 to 3129in Example 3-1, Samples 3201 to 3227 in Example 3-2, Samples 3301 to3328 in Example 3-3, and Samples 3401 to 3403 in Example 3-4, exceptthat the support was replaced with a PET reflection support of 175 μmthickness, in which PET was kneaded with barium sulfate. An evaluationaccording to Example 3-1 was carried out, and essentially the sameresults were obtained.

Example 3-6

[0676] Samples 3101 to 3129 in Example 3-1, Samples 3201 to 3227 inExample 3-2, Samples 3301 to 3328 in Example 3-3, and Samples 3401 to3403 in Example 3-4 were scan-exposed by means of each exposureapparatus set forth below. An evaluation according to Example 3-1 wasconducted. The thus-obtained results demonstrate that each sampleaccording to the present invention exhibited the effects of theinvention of excellent fastness to light and processing stability,regardless of the kind of exposure apparatus used.

[0677] Exposure Apparatus

[0678] Digital Mini-Lab FRONTIER 330 (trade name, manufactured by FujiPhoto Film Co., Ltd.)

[0679] Lambda 130 (trade name, manufactured by Durst Co.)

[0680] LIGHTJET 5000 (trade name, manufactured by Gretag Co.)

Example 3-7

[0681] Samples were prepared in the same manner as the samples inExamples 3-1, 3-2 and 3-3, except for changing the composition as setforth below.

[0682] Coating amount of the blue-sensitive silver halide

[0683] emulsion layer: 240%

[0684] Coating amount of the green-sensitive silver halide

[0685] emulsion layer: 250%

[0686] Coating amount of the red-sensitive silver halide

[0687] emulsion layer: 260%

[0688] Support: 180 μm thick polyethylene terephthalate

[0689] transparent support

[0690] Each of these samples was processed according to processingprocess B in Examples 3-1, 3-2 and 3-3, except that, in this processingprocess, each of the processing steps was prolonged by 2.7 times. Thesame evaluation as in Example 3-1 was conducted. The thus-obtainedresults demonstrate that use of the yellow coupler and the additive(s)defined in the present invention, in combination, gave photosensitivematerials excellent in image fastness.

[0691] Having described our invention as related to the presentembodiments, it is our intention that the invention not be limited byany of the details of the description, unless otherwise specified, butrather be construed broadly within its spirit and scope as set out inthe accompanying claims.

What we claim is:
 1. A silver halide color photographic photosensitive material, comprising, in at least one layer on a support, at least one compound which has a microhardness value of 200 or less when forming a polymerized film and contains at least three alkenylcarbonyl groups in the molecule.
 2. The silver halide color photographic photosensitive material according to claim 1, which has, on the support, at least one yellow color-forming photosensitive silver halide emulsion layer, at least one magenta color-forming photosensitive silver halide emulsion layer, and at least one cyan color-forming photosensitive silver halide emulsion layer, wherein at least one yellow dye-forming coupler represented by formula (I) and the compound which has a microhardness value of 200 or less when forming a polymerized film and contains at least three alkenylcarbonyl groups in the molecule are contained in the same layer:

wherein, in formula (I), Q represents a group of non-metal atoms that forms a 5- to 7-membered ring in combination with the —N═C—N(R1)—; R1 represents a substituent; R2 represents a substituent; m represents an integer of 0 or more and 5 or less; when m is 2 or more, R2s may be the same or different, or R2s may bond together to form a ring; and X represents a hydrogen atom, or a group capable of being split-off upon a coupling reaction with an oxidized product of a developing agent.
 3. The silver halide color photographic photosensitive material according to claim 2, further containing at least one compound represented by formula (Ph):

wherein, in formula (Ph), R_(b1) represents an aliphatic group, an aryl group, a carbamoyl group, an acylamino group, a carbonyl group, or a sulfonyl group; and R_(b2), R_(b3), R_(b4) and R_(b5) each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group, an aliphatic group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an alkyloxy group, an aryloxy group, a heterocyclic oxy group, an oxycarbonyl group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, an oxycarbonyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an acylamino group, a sulfonyl group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfamoyl group, an alkylthio group, or an arylthio group.
 4. The silver halide color photographic photosensitive material according to claim 3, wherein the compound represented by formula (Ph) is a compound represented by any one of formulae (Ph-1), (Ph-2) and (Ph-3):

wherein, in formulae (Ph-1), (Ph-2) and (Ph-3), R_(b6) represents an aliphatic group, an aryl group, an amino group, or an acyl group; R_(b1) has the same meaning as defined in formula (Ph); R_(b7), R_(b8), R_(b9), R_(b11), R_(b12), R_(b13), R_(b14), R_(b15), R_(b16), R_(b19), and R_(b20) each independetly have the same meanings as R_(b2), R_(b3), R_(b4), and R_(b5) in formula (Ph); R_(b10) represents a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group, an acyl group, an oxycarbonyl group, a silyl group, or a phosphoryl group; X_(b) represents an alkylene group, a phenylene group, —O—, or —S—; and R_(b17) and R_(b18) each independently represent an aliphatic group or an aryl group.
 5. The silver halide color photographic photosensitive material according to claim 2, further containing at least one compound selected from the group consisting of compounds represented by any one of formulae (E-1), (E-2) and (E-3):

wherein, in formulae (E-1), (E-2) and (E-3), R₄₁ represents an aliphatic group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an acyl group, an aliphatic oxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, an aliphatic sulfonyl group, an arylsulfonyl group, a phosphoryl group, or —Si(R₄₇)(R₄₈)(R₄₉), in which R₄₇, R₄₈ and R₄₉ each independently represent an aliphatic group, an aryl group, an aliphatic oxy group, or an aryloxy group; R₄₂, R₄₃, R₄₅ and R₄₆ each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent; and Ra₁, Ra₂, Ra₃ and Ra₄ each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an aliphatic group.
 6. The silver halide color photographic photosensitive material as claimed in claim 2, further containing at least one compound selected from the group consisting of a metal complex, a ultraviolet absorbing agent, a water-insoluble homopolymer or copolymer, and a compound represented by any one of formulae (TS-I), (TS-II), (TS-III), (TS-IV), (TS-V), (TS-VI) and (TS-VII):

wherein, in formula (TS-I), R₅₁ represents a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an acyl group, an aliphatic oxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, an aliphatic sulfonyl group, an aryl sulfonyl group, a phosphoryl group, or —Si(R₅₈)(R₅₉)(R₆₀), in which R₅₈, R₅₉ and R₆₀ each independently represent an aliphatic group, an aryl group, an aliphatic oxy group or an aryloxy group; X₅₁ represents —O— or —N(R₅₇)—, in which R₅₇ has the same meaning as R₅₁; X₅₅ represents —N═ or —C(R₅₂)═; X₅₆ represents —N═ or —C(R₅₄)═; X₅₇ represents —N═ or —C(R₅₆)═; R₅₂, R₅₃, R₅₄, R₅₅ and R₅₆ each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent; each combination of R₅₁ and R₅₂, R₅₇ and R₅₆, and R₅₁ and R₅₇ may bond together to form a 5- to 7-membered ring; each combination of R₅₂ and R₅₃, and R₅₃ and R₅₄ may bond together to form a 5- to 7-membered ring, a spiro ring, or a bicyclo ring; each of R₅₁, R₅₂, R₅₃, R₅₄, R₅₅, R₅₆ and R₅₇ cannot simultaneously represent a hydrogen atom; and the total of carbon atoms of the compound represented by formula (TS-I) is 10 or more; wherein, in formula (TS-II), R₆₁, R₆₂, R₆₃ and R₆₄ each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an aliphatic group; each combination of R₆₁ and R₆₂, and R₆₃ and R₆₄ may bond together to form a 5- to 7-membered ring; X₆₁ represents a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group, an aliphatic oxy group, an aliphatic oxycarbonyl group, an aryl oxycarbonyl group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, an aliphatic oxycarbonyloxy group, an aryl oxycarbonyloxy group, an aliphatic sulfonyl group, an aryl sulfonyl group, an aliphatic sulfinyl group, an aryl sulfinyl group, a sulfamoyl group, a carbamoyl group, a hydroxy group, or an oxy radical group; X₆₂ represents a group of non-metal atoms necessary to form a 5- to 7-membered ring together with the —C(—R₆₁)(—R₆₂)—N(—X₆₁)—C(—R₆₃)(—R₆₄)—; and the total of carbon atoms of the compound represented by formula (TS-II) is 8 or more; wherein, in formula (TS-III), R₆₅ and R₆₆ each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group, an aryl group, an acyl group, an aliphatic oxycarbonyl group, an aryl oxycarbonyl group, a carbamoyl group, an aliphatic sulfonyl group, or an aryl sulfonyl group; R₆₇ represents a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group, an aliphatic oxy group, an aryloxy group, an aliphatic thio group, an arylthio group, an acyloxy group, an aliphatic oxycarbonyloxy group, an aryl oxycarbonyloxy group, a substituted amino group, a heterocyclic group, or a hydroxyl group; each combination of R₆₅ and R₆₆, R₆₆ and R₆₇, and R₆₅ and R₆₇ may bond together to form a 5- to 7-membered ring except 2,2,6,6-tetraalkylpiperidine skeleton; each of R₆₅ and R₆₆ cannot simultaneously represent a hydrogen atom; and the total of carbon atoms of R₆₅ and R₆₆ is 7 or more; wherein, in formula (TS-IV), R₇₁ represents a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, Li, Na, or K; R₇₂ represents an aliphatic group, an aryl group, or a heterocyclic group; R₇₁ and R₇₂ may bond together to form a 5- to 7-membered ring; q represents 0, 1 or 2; and the total of carbon atoms of R₇₁ and R₇₂ is 10 or more; wherein, in formula (TS-V), R₈₁, R₈₂ and R₈₃ each independently represent an aliphatic group, an aryl group, an aliphatic oxy group, an aryloxy group, an aliphatic amino group, or an aryl amino group; t represents 0 or 1; each combination of R₈₁ and R₈₂, and R₈₁ and R₈₃ may bond together to form a 5- to 8-membered ring; and the total of carbon atoms of R₈₁, R₈₂ and R₈₃ is 10 or more; wherein, in formula (TS-VI), R₈₅, R₈₆, R₈₇ and R₈₈ each independently represent a hydrogen atom, or a substituent except a carbonyl group, and any two of R₈₅, R₈₆, R₈₇ and R₈₈ may bond together to form a 5- to 7-membered ring except an aromatic ring only consisting of carbon atoms as a skeleton atom; the total of carbon atoms of the compound represented by formula (TS-VI) is 10 or more; and each of R₈₅, R₈₆, R₈₇ and R₈₈ cannot simultaneously represent a hydrogen atom; and wherein, in formula (TS-VII), R₉₁ represents a hydrophobic group having total carbon atoms of 10 or more; and Y₉₁ represents a monovalent organic group containing an alcoholic hydroxyl group.
 7. The silver halide color photographic photosensitive material according to claim 2, wherein the yellow dye-forming coupler represented by formula (I) is a yellow dye-forming coupler represented by formula (II):

wherein, in formula (II), R1 represents a substituent; R2 represents a substituent; m represents an integer of 0 to 5; when m is 2 or more, R2s may be the same or different, or R2s may bond each other to form a ring; R3 represents a substituent; na represents an integer of 0 to 4; when na is 2 or more, R3s may be the same or different, or R3s may bond each other to form a ring; and X represents a hydrogen atom, or a group capable of being split-off upon a coupling reaction with an oxidized product of a developing agent.
 8. The silver halide color photographic photosensitive material according to claim 7, wherein, in the dye-forming coupler represented by formula (II), R1 is a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group.
 9. The silver halide color photographic photosensitive material according to claim 7, wherein the dye-forming coupler represented by formula (II) is a dye-forming coupler represented by formula (III):

wherein, in formula (III), R1, R2 and R3 each independently represent a substituent; ma represents an integer of 0 to 4; when ma is 2 or more, R2s may be the same or different, or R2s may bond each other to form a ring; na represents an integer of 0 to 4; when na is 2 or more, R3s may be the same or different, or R3s may bond each other to form a ring; R4 represents an alkylthio group; and X represents a hydrogen atom, or a group capable of being split-off upon a coupling reaction with an oxidized product of a developing agent.
 10. The silver halide color photographic photosensitive material according to claim 9, wherein, in the dye-forming coupler represented by formula (III), R1 is an alkoxypropyl group.
 11. The silver halide color photographic photosensitive material according to claim 10, wherein, in the dye-forming coupler represented by formula (III), at least one R2 is a t-butyl group located in the para-position to the —S—R4 group.
 12. The silver halide color photographic photosensitive material according to claim 9, wherein, in the dye-forming coupler represented by formula (III), X is a 5,5-dimethyloxazolidine-2,4-dione-3-yl group.
 13. The silver halide color photographic photosensitive material according to claim 2, wherein a total amount of coated silver in entire photographic constitutional layers is 0.45 g/m² or less.
 14. A method of forming an image, comprising the step of subjecting the silver halide color photographic photosensitive material according to claim 2 to a color-development processing with a color-developing time ranging from 10 seconds to 20 seconds.
 15. A method of forming an image, which comprises exposing the silver halide color photographic photosensitive material according to claim 2 to light by a scanning exposure system, wherein an exposure time per picture element is 1×10⁻⁸ to 1×10⁻⁴ seconds, and there is an overlapping between rasters adjacent to each other.
 16. A silver halide color photographic photosensitive material, comprising, in at least one layer on a support, at least one compound represented by formula (A):

wherein, in formula (A), R₁, R₂ and R₃ each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group, or an aryl group; R₄ represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent; X₁ represents a divalent organic group; n represents 0 or 1; a represents an integer of 1 to 6; b represents an integer of 0 to 5; a+b is 6; when a is 2 or more, a plurality of —(X₁)_(n)—COC(R₁)═C(R₂)R₃ may be the same or different; and when b is 2 or more, R₄'s may be the same or different.
 17. The silver halide color photographic photosensitive material according to claim 16, which has, on the support, at least one yellow color-forming photosensitive silver halide emulsion layer, at least one magenta color-forming photosensitive silver halide emulsion layer, and at least one cyan color-forming photosensitive silver halide emulsion layer, wherein at least one yellow dye-forming coupler represented by formula (I) and the compound represented by formula (A) are contained in the same layer:

wherein, in formula (I), Q represents a group of non-metal atoms that forms a 5- to 7-membered ring in combination with the —N═C—N(R1)—; R1 represents a substituent; R2 represents a substituent; m represents an integer of 0 or more and 5 or less; when m is 2 or more, R2s may be the same or different, or R2s may bond together to form a ring; and X represents a hydrogen atom, or a group capable of being split-off upon a coupling reaction with an oxidized product of a developing agent.
 18. The silver halide color photographic photosensitive material according to claim 17, further containing at least one compound represented by formula (Ph):

wherein, in formula (Ph), R_(b1) represents an aliphatic group, an aryl group, a carbamoyl group, an acylamino group, a carbonyl group, or a sulfonyl group; and R_(b2), R_(b3), R_(b4) and R_(b5) each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group, an aliphatic group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an alkyloxy group, an aryloxy group, a heterocyclic oxy group, an oxycarbonyl group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, an oxycarbonyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an acylamino group, a sulfonyl group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfamoyl group, an alkylthio group, or an arylthio group.
 19. The silver halide color photographic photosensitive material according to claim 18, wherein the compound represented by formula (Ph) is a compound represented by any one of formulae (Ph-1), (Ph-2) and (Ph-3):

wherein, in formulae (Ph-1), (Ph-2) and (Ph-3), R_(b6) represents an aliphatic group, an aryl group, an amino group, or an acyl group; R_(b1) has the same meaning as defined in formula (Ph); R_(b7), R_(b8), R_(b9), R_(b11), R_(b12), R_(b13), R_(b14), R_(b15), R_(b16), R_(b19), and R_(b20) each independetly have the same meanings as R_(b2), R_(b3), R_(b4), and R_(b5) in formula (Ph); R_(b10) represents a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group, an acyl group, an oxycarbonyl group, a silyl group, or a phosphoryl group; X_(b) represents an alkylene group, a phenylene group, —O—, or —S—; and R_(b17) and R_(b18) each independently represent an aliphatic group or an aryl group.
 20. The silver halide color photographic photosensitive material according to claim 17, further containing at least one compound selected from the group consisting of compounds represented by any one of formulae (E-1), (E-2) and (E-3):

wherein, in formulae (E-1), (E-2) and (E-3), R₄₁ represents an aliphatic group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an acyl group, an aliphatic oxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, an aliphatic sulfonyl group, an arylsulfonyl group, a phosphoryl group, or —Si(R₄₇)(R₄₈)(R₄₉), in which R₄₇, R₄₈ and R₄₉ each independently represent an aliphatic group, an aryl group, an aliphatic oxy group, or an aryloxy group; R₄₂, R₄₃, R₄₅ and R₄₆ each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent; and Ra₁, Ra₂, Ra₃ and Ra₄ each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an aliphatic group.
 21. The silver halide color photographic photosensitive material as claimed in claim 17, further containing at least one compound selected from the group consisting of a metal complex, a ultraviolet absorbing agent, a water-insoluble homopolymer or copolymer, and a compound represented by any one of formulae (TS-I), (TS-II), (TS-III), (TS-IV), (TS-V), (TS-VI) and (TS-VII):

wherein, in formula (TS-I), R₅₁ represents a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an acyl group, an aliphatic oxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, an aliphatic sulfonyl group, an aryl sulfonyl group, a phosphoryl group, or —Si(R₅₈)(R₅₉)(R₆₀), in which R₅₈, R₅₉ and R₆₀ each independently represent an aliphatic group, an aryl group, an aliphatic oxy group or an aryloxy group; X₅₁ represents —O— or —N(R₅₇)—, in which R₅₇ has the same meaning as R₅₁; X₅₅ represents —N═ or —C(R₅₂)═; X₅₆ represents —N═ or —C(R₅₄)═; X₅₇ represents —N═ or —C(R₅₆)═; R₅₂, R₅₃, R₅₄, R₅₅ and R₅₆ each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent; each combination of R₅₁ and R₅₂, R₅₇ and R₅₆, and R₅₁ and R₅₇ may bond together to form a 5- to 7-membered ring; each combination of R₅₂ and R₅₃, and R₅₃ and R₅₄ may bond together to form a 5- to 7-membered ring, a spiro ring, or a bicyclo ring; each of R₅₁, R₅₂, R₅₃, R₅₄, R₅₅, R₅₆ and R₅₇ cannot simultaneously represent a hydrogen atom; and the total of carbon atoms of the compound represented by formula (TS-I) is 10 or more; wherein, in formula (TS-II), R₆₁, R₆₂, R₆₃ and R₆₄ each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an aliphatic group; each combination of R₆₁ and R₆₂, and R₆₃ and R₆₄ may bond together to form a 5- to 7-membered ring; X₆₁ represents a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group, an aliphatic oxy group, an aliphatic oxycarbonyl group, an aryl oxycarbonyl group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, an aliphatic oxycarbonyloxy group, an aryl oxycarbonyloxy group, an aliphatic sulfonyl group, an aryl sulfonyl group, an aliphatic sulfinyl group, an aryl sulfinyl group, a sulfamoyl group, a carbamoyl group, a hydroxy group, or an oxy radical group; X₆₂ represents a group of non-metal atoms necessary to form a 5- to 7-membered ring together with the —C(—R₆₁)(—R₆₂)—N(—X₆₁)—C(—R₆₃)(—R₆₄)—; and the total of carbon atoms of the compound represented by formula (TS-II) is 8 or more; wherein, in formula (TS-III), R₆₅ and R₆₆ each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group, an aryl group, an acyl group, an aliphatic oxycarbonyl group, an aryl oxycarbonyl group, a carbamoyl group, an aliphatic sulfonyl group, or an aryl sulfonyl group; R₆₇ represents a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group, an aliphatic oxy group, an aryloxy group, an aliphatic thio group, an arylthio group, an acyloxy group, an aliphatic oxycarbonyloxy group, an aryl oxycarbonyloxy group, a substituted amino group, a heterocyclic group, or a hydroxyl group; each combination of R₆₅ and R₆₆, R₆₆ and R₆₇, and R₆₅ and R₆₇ may bond together to form a 5- to 7-membered ring except 2,2,6,6-tetraalkylpiperidine skeleton; each of R₆₅ and R₆₆ cannot simultaneously represent a hydrogen atom; and the total of carbon atoms of R₆₅ and R₆₆ is 7 or more; wherein, in formula (TS-IV), R₇₁ represents a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, Li, Na, or K; R₇₂ represents an aliphatic group, an aryl group, or a heterocyclic group; R₇₁ and R₇₂ may bond together to form a 5- to 7-membered ring; q represents 0, 1 or 2; and the total of carbon atoms of R₇₁ and R₇₂ is 10 or more; wherein, in formula (TS-V), R₈₁, R₈₂ and R₈₃ each independently represent an aliphatic group, an aryl group, an aliphatic oxy group, an aryloxy group, an aliphatic amino group, or an aryl amino group; t represents 0 or 1; each combination of R₈₁ and R₈₂, and R₈₁ and R₈₃ may bond together to form a 5- to 8-membered ring; and the total of carbon atoms of R₈₁, R₈₂ and R₈₃ is 10 or more; wherein, in formula (TS-VI), R₈₅, R₈₆, R₈₇ and R₈₈ each independently represent a hydrogen atom, or a substituent except a carbonyl group, and any two of R₈₅, R₈₆, R₈₇ and R₈₈ may bond together to form a 5- to 7-membered ring except an aromatic ring only consisting of carbon atoms as a skeleton atom; the total of carbon atoms of the compound represented by formula (TS-VI) is 10 or more; and each of R₈₅, R₈₆, R₈₇ and R₈₈ cannot simultaneously represent a hydrogen atom; and wherein, in formula (TS-VII), R₉₁ represents a hydrophobic group having total carbon atoms of 10 or more; and Y₉₁ represents a monovalent organic group containing an alcoholic hydroxyl group.
 22. The silver halide color photographic photosensitive material according to claim 17, wherein the yellow dye-forming coupler represented by formula (I) is a yellow dye-forming coupler represented by formula (II):

wherein, in formula (II), R1 represents a substituent; R2 represents a substituent; m represents an integer of 0 to 5; when m is 2 or more, R2s may be the same or different, or R2s may bond each other to form a ring; R3 represents a substituent; na represents an integer of 0 to 4; when na is 2 or more, R3s may be the same or different, or R3s may bond each other to form a ring; and X represents a hydrogen atom, or a group capable of being split-off upon a coupling reaction with an oxidized product of a developing agent.
 23. The silver halide color photographic photosensitive material according to claim 22, wherein, in the dye-forming coupler represented by formula (II), R1 is a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group.
 24. The silver halide color photographic photosensitive material according to claim 22, wherein the dye-forming coupler represented by formula (II) is a dye-forming coupler represented by formula (III):

wherein, in formula (III), R1, R2 and R3 each independently represent a substituent; ma represents an integer of 0 to 4; when ma is 2 or more, R2s may be the same or different, or R2s may bond each other to form a ring; na represents an integer of 0 to 4; when na is 2 or more, R3s may be the same or different, or R3s may bond each other to form a ring; R4 represents an alkylthio group; and X represents a hydrogen atom, or a group capable of being split-off upon a coupling reaction with an oxidized product of a developing agent.
 25. The silver halide color photographic photosensitive material according to claim 24, wherein, in the dye-forming coupler represented by formula (III), R1 is an alkoxypropyl group.
 26. The silver halide color photographic photosensitive material according to claim 25, wherein, in the dye-forming coupler represented by formula (III), at least one R2 is a t-butyl group located in the para-position to the —S—R4 group.
 27. The silver halide color photographic photosensitive material according to claim 24, wherein, in the dye-forming coupler represented by formula (III), X is a 5,5-dimethyloxazolidine-2,4-dione-3-yl group.
 28. The silver halide color photographic photosensitive material according to claim 17, wherein a total amount of coated silver in entire photographic constitutional layers is 0.45 g/m² or less.
 29. A method of forming an image, comprising the step of subjecting the silver halide color photographic photosensitive material according to claim 17 to a color-development processing with a color-developing time ranging from 10 seconds to 20 seconds.
 30. A method of forming an image, which comprises exposing the silver halide color photographic photosensitive material according to claim 17 to light by a scanning exposure system, wherein an exposure time per picture element is 1×10⁻⁸ to 1×10⁻⁴ seconds, and there is an overlapping between rasters adjacent to each other.
 31. A silver halide color photographic photosensitive material, comprising, in at least one layer on a support, at least one compound represented by formula (A) and having a microhardness value of 200 or less when forming a polymerized film:

wherein, in formula (A), R₁, R₂ and R₃ each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group, or an aryl group; R₄ represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent; X₁ represents a divalent organic group; n represents 0 or 1; a represents an integer of 1 to 6; b represents an integer of 0 to 5; a+b is 6; when a is 2 or more, a plurality of —(X1)_(n)—COC(R₁)═C(R₂)R₃ may be the same or different; and when b is 2 or more, R₄'s may be the same or different.
 32. The silver halide color photographic photosensitive material according to claim 31, which has, on the support, at least one yellow color-forming photosensitive silver halide emulsion layer, at least one magenta color-forming photosensitive silver halide emulsion layer, and at least one cyan color-forming photosensitive silver halide emulsion layer, wherein at least one yellow dye-forming coupler represented by formula (I), and the compound represented by formula (A) and having a microhardness value of 200 or less when forming a polymerized film are contained in the same layer:

wherein, in formula (I), Q represents a group of non-metal atoms that forms a 5- to 7-membered ring in combination with the —N═C—N(R1)—; R1 represents a substituent; R2 represents a substituent; m represents an integer of 0 or more and 5 or less; when m is 2 or more, R2s may be the same or different, or R2s may bond together to form a ring; and X represents a hydrogen atom, or a group capable of being split-off upon a coupling reaction with an oxidized product of a developing agent.
 33. The silver halide color photographic photosensitive material according to claim 32, further containing at least one compound represented by formula (Ph):

wherein, in formula (Ph), R_(b1) represents an aliphatic group, an aryl group, a carbamoyl group, an acylamino group, a carbonyl group, or a sulfonyl group; and R_(b2), R_(b3), R_(b4) and R_(b5) each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group, an aliphatic group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an alkyloxy group, an aryloxy group, a heterocyclic oxy group, an oxycarbonyl group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, an oxycarbonyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an acylamino group, a sulfonyl group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfamoyl group, an alkylthio group, or an arylthio group.
 34. The silver halide color photographic photosensitive material according to claim 33, wherein the compound represented by formula (Ph) is a compound represented by any one of formulae (Ph-1), (Ph-2) and (Ph-3):

wherein, in formulae (Ph-1), (Ph-2) and (Ph-3), R_(b6) represents an aliphatic group, an aryl group, an amino group, or an acyl group; R_(b1) has the same meaning as defined in formula (Ph); R_(b7), R_(b8), R_(b9), R_(b11), R_(b12), R_(b13), R_(b14), R_(b15), R_(b16), R_(b19), and R_(b20) each independetly have the same meanings as R_(b2), R_(b3), R_(b4), and R_(b5) in formula (Ph); R_(b10) represents a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group, an acyl group, an oxycarbonyl group, a silyl group, or a phosphoryl group; X_(b) represents an alkylene group, a phenylene group, —O—, or —S—; and R_(b17) and R_(b18) each independently represent an aliphatic group or an aryl group.
 35. The silver halide color photographic photosensitive material according to claim 32, further containing at least one compound selected from the group consisting of compounds represented by any one of formulae (E-1), (E-2) and (E-3):

wherein, in formulae (E-1), (E-2) and (E-3), R₄₁ represents an aliphatic group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an acyl group, an aliphatic oxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, an aliphatic sulfonyl group, an arylsulfonyl group, a phosphoryl group, or —Si(R₄₇)(R₄₈)(R₄₉), in which R₄₇, R₄₈ and R₄₉ each independently represent an aliphatic group, an aryl group, an aliphatic oxy group, or an aryloxy group; R₄₂, R₄₃, R₄₅ and R₄₆ each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent; and Ra₁, Ra₂, Ra₃ and Ra₄ each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an aliphatic group.
 36. The silver halide color photographic photosensitive material as claimed in claim 32, further containing at least one compound selected from the group consisting of a metal complex, a ultraviolet absorbing agent, a water-insoluble homopolymer or copolymer, and a compound represented by any one of formulae (TS-I), (TS-II), (TS-III), (TS-IV), (TS-V), (TS-VI) and (TS-VII):

wherein, in formula (TS-I), R₅₁ represents a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an acyl group, an aliphatic oxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, an aliphatic sulfonyl group, an aryl sulfonyl group, a phosphoryl group, or —Si(R₅₈)(R₅₉)(R₆₀), in which R₅₈, R₅₉ and R₆₀ each independently represent an aliphatic group, an aryl group, an aliphatic oxy group or an aryloxy group; X₅₁ represents —O— or —N(R₅₇)—, in which R₅₇ has the same meaning as R₅₁; X₅₅ represents —N═ or —C(R₅₂)═; X₅₆ represents —N═ or —C(R₅₄)═; X₅₇ represents —N═ or —C(R₅₆)═; R₅₂, R₅₃, R₅₄, R₅₅ and R₅₆ each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent; each combination of R₅₁ and R₅₂, R₅₇ and R₅₆, and R₅₁ and R₅₇ may bond together to form a 5- to 7-membered ring; each combination of R₅₂ and R₅₃, and R₅₃ and R₅₄ may bond together to form a 5- to 7-membered ring, a spiro ring, or a bicyclo ring; each of R₅₁, R₅₂, R₅₃, R₅₄, R₅₅, R₅₆ and R₅₇ cannot simultaneously represent a hydrogen atom; and the total of carbon atoms of the compound represented by formula (TS-I) is 10 or more; wherein, in formula (TS-II), R₆₁, R₆₂, R₆₃ and R₆₄ each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an aliphatic group; each combination of R₆₁ and R₆₂, and R₆₃ and R₆₄ may bond together to form a 5- to 7-membered ring; X₆₁ represents a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group, an aliphatic oxy group, an aliphatic oxycarbonyl group, an aryl oxycarbonyl group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, an aliphatic oxycarbonyloxy group, an aryl oxycarbonyloxy group, an aliphatic sulfonyl group, an aryl sulfonyl group, an aliphatic sulfinyl group, an aryl sulfinyl group, a sulfamoyl group, a carbamoyl group, a hydroxy group, or an oxy radical group; X₆₂ represents a group of non-metal atoms necessary to form a 5- to 7-membered ring together with the —C(—R₆₁)(—R₆₂)—N(—X₆₁)—C(—R₆₃)(—R₆₄)—; and the total of carbon atoms of the compound represented by formula (TS-II) is 8 or more; wherein, in formula (TS-III), R₆₅ and R₆₆ each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group, an aryl group, an acyl group, an aliphatic oxycarbonyl group, an aryl oxycarbonyl group, a carbamoyl group, an aliphatic sulfonyl group, or an aryl sulfonyl group; R₆₇ represents a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group, an aliphatic oxy group, an aryloxy group, an aliphatic thio group, an arylthio group, an acyloxy group, an aliphatic oxycarbonyloxy group, an aryl oxycarbonyloxy group, a substituted amino group, a heterocyclic group, or a hydroxyl group; each combination of R₆₅ and R₆₆, R₆₆ and R₆₇, and R₆₅ and R₆₇ may bond together to form a 5- to 7-membered ring except 2,2,6,6-tetraalkylpiperidine skeleton; each of R₆₅ and R₆₆ cannot simultaneously represent a hydrogen atom; and the total of carbon atoms of R₆₅ and R₆₆ is 7 or more; wherein, in formula (TS-IV), R₇₁ represents a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, Li, Na, or K; R₇₂ represents an aliphatic group, an aryl group, or a heterocyclic group; R₇₁ and R₇₂ may bond together to form a 5- to 7-membered ring; q represents 0, 1 or 2; and the total of carbon atoms of R₇₁, and R₇₂ is 10 or more; wherein, in formula (TS-V), R₈₁, R₈₂ and R₈₃ each independently represent an aliphatic group, an aryl group, an aliphatic oxy group, an aryloxy group, an aliphatic amino group, or an aryl amino group; t represents 0 or 1; each combination of R₈₁ and R₈₂, and R₈₁ and R₈₃ may bond together to form a 5- to 8-membered ring; and the total of carbon atoms of R₈₁, R₈₂ and R₈₃ is 10 or more; wherein, in formula (TS-VI), R₈₅, R₈₆, R₈₇ and R₈₈ each independently represent a hydrogen atom, or a substituent except a carbonyl group, and any two of R₈₅, R₈₆, R₈₇ and R₈₈ may bond together to form a 5- to 7-membered ring except an aromatic ring only consisting of carbon atoms as a skeleton atom; the total of carbon atoms of the compound represented by formula (TS-VI) is 10 or more; and each of R₈₅, R₈₆, R₈₇ and R₈₈ cannot simultaneously represent a hydrogen atom; and wherein, in formula (TS-VII), R₉₁ represents a hydrophobic group having total carbon atoms of 10 or more; and Y₉₁ represents a monovalent organic group containing an alcoholic hydroxyl group.
 37. The silver halide color photographic photosensitive material according to claim 32, wherein the yellow dye-forming coupler represented by formula (I) is a yellow dye-forming coupler represented by formula (II):

wherein, in formula (II), R1 represents a substituent; R2 represents a substituent; m represents an integer of 0 to 5; when m is 2 or more, R2s may be the same or different, or R2s may bond each other to form a ring; R3 represents a substituent; na represents an integer of 0 to 4; when na is 2 or more, R3s may be the same or different, or R3s may bond each other to form a ring; and X represents a hydrogen atom, or a group capable of being split-off upon a coupling reaction with an oxidized product of a developing agent.
 38. The silver halide color photographic photosensitive material according to claim 37, wherein, in the dye-forming coupler represented by formula (II), R1 is a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group.
 39. The silver halide color photographic photosensitive material according to claim 37, wherein the dye-forming coupler represented by formula (II) is a dye-forming coupler represented by formula (III):

wherein, in formula (III), R1, R2 and R3 each independently represent a substituent; ma represents an integer of 0 to 4; when ma is 2 or more, R2s may be the same or different, or R2s may bond each other to form a ring; na represents an integer of 0 to 4; when na is 2 or more, R3s may be the same or different, or R3s may bond each other to form a ring; R4 represents an alkylthio group; and X represents a hydrogen atom, or a group capable of being split-off upon a coupling reaction with an oxidized product of a developing agent.
 40. The silver halide color photographic photosensitive material according to claim 39, wherein, in the dye-forming coupler represented by formula (III), R1 is an alkoxypropyl group.
 41. The silver halide color photographic photosensitive material according to claim 40, wherein, in the dye-forming coupler represented by formula (III), at least one R2 is a t-butyl group located in the para-position to the —S—R4 group.
 42. The silver halide color photographic photosensitive material according to claim 39, wherein, in the dye-forming coupler represented by formula (III), X is a 5,5-dimethyloxazolidine-2,4-dione-3-yl group.
 43. The silver halide color photographic photosensitive material according to claim 32, wherein a total amount of coated silver in entire photographic constitutional layers is 0.45 g/m² or less.
 44. A method of forming an image, comprising the step of subjecting the silver halide color photographic photosensitive material according to claim 32 to a color-development processing with a color-developing time ranging from 10 seconds to 20 seconds.
 45. A method of forming an image, which comprises exposing the silver halide color photographic photosensitive material according to claim 32 to light by a scanning exposure system, wherein an exposure time per picture element is 1×10⁻⁸ to 1×10⁻⁴ seconds, and there is an overlapping between rasters adjacent to each other.
 46. A silver halide color photographic photosensitive material, comprising, on a support, at least one yellow color-forming photosensitive silver halide emulsion layer, at least one magenta color-forming photosensitive silver halide emulsion layer, and at least one cyan color-forming photosensitive silver halide emulsion layer, wherein at least one yellow dye-forming coupler represented by formula (I), and at least one compound represented by formula (B) and having a molecular weight of 200 or more are contained in the same layer:

wherein, in formula (I), Q represents a group of non-metal atoms that forms a 5- to 7-membered ring in combination with the —N═C—N(R1)—; R1 represents a substituent; R2 represents a substituent; m represents an integer of 0 or more and 5 or less; when m is 2 or more, R2s may be the same or different, or R2s may bond together to form a ring; and X represents a hydrogen atom, or a group capable of being split-off upon a coupling reaction with an oxidized product of a developing agent;

wherein, in formula (B), R₁₁, R₁₂ and R₁₃ each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group or an aryl group; R_(b) represents a n1-valent aliphatic, aryl or heterocyclic group; X₂ represents a divalent organic group; n1 represents an integer of 1 or more; n2 represents an integer of 0 or more; when n2 is 2 or more, X₂'s may be the same or different.
 47. The silver halide color photographic photosensitive material according to claim 46, wherein the yellow dye-forming coupler represented by formula (I) is a yellow dye-forming coupler represented by formula (YC-I):

wherein, in formula (YC-I), Qa represents a group of non-metal atoms necessary to form a 5- to 7-membered ring in combination with the —N═C—N((CH₂)₃O—R21)—; R21 represents an alkyl group having carbon atoms of 4 or more and 8 or less; R22 represents a substituent; R24 represents a primary alkyl group; mb represents an integer of 0 or more and 4 or less; when mb is 2 or more, R22s may be the same or different, or R22s may bond together to form a ring; and Xa represents a hydrogen atom, or a group capable of being split-off upon a coupling reaction with an oxidized product of a developing agent.
 48. The silver halide color photographic photosensitive material according to claim 46, wherein, in formula (B), n1 is
 1. 49. The silver halide color photographic photosensitive material according to claim 46, wherein, in formula (B), n1 is
 2. 50. The silver halide color photographic photosensitive material according to claim 46, wherein, in formula (B), n1 is 3; and R_(b) is a heterocyclic group.
 51. The silver halide color photographic photosensitive material according to claim 46, wherein, in formula (B), n1 is 3; and X₂ is represented by formula (C): Formula (C) *—RcO— The sign * indicates a bonding site with Rb. wherein, in formula (C), R_(c) represents an alkylene group; and when n2 is 2 or more, —RcO—'s may be the same or different.
 52. The silver halide color photographic photosensitive material according to claim 46, wherein, in formula (B), n1 is
 4. 53. The silver halide color photographic photosensitive material according to claim 46, wherein, in formula (B), R₁₁, R₁₂ and R₁₃ each are a hydrogen atom.
 54. The silver halide color photographic photosensitive material according to claim 46, further containing at least one compound represented by formula (Ph) in the layer containing said at least one yellow dye-forming coupler represented by formula (I):

wherein, in formula (Ph), R_(b1) represents an aliphatic group, an aryl group, a carbamoyl group, an acylamino group, a carbonyl group, or a sulfonyl group; and R_(b2), R_(b3), R_(b4) and R_(b5) each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group, an aliphatic group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an alkyloxy group, an aryloxy group, a heterocyclic oxy group, an oxycarbonyl group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, an oxycarbonyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an acylamino group, a sulfonyl group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfamoyl group, an alkylthio group, or an arylthio group.
 55. The silver halide color photographic photosensitive material according to claim 54, wherein the compound represented by formula (Ph) is a compound represented by any one of formulae (Ph-1), (Ph-2) and (Ph-3):

wherein, in formulae (Ph-1), (Ph-2) and (Ph-3), R_(b1) represents an aliphatic group, an aryl group, a carbamoyl group, an acylamino group, a carbonyl group, or a sulfonyl group; R_(b6) represents an aliphatic group, an aryl group, an amino group, or an acyl group; R_(b7), R_(b8), R_(b9), R_(b11), R_(b12), R_(b13), R_(b14), R_(b15), R_(b16), R_(b19), and R_(b20) each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group, an aliphatic group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an alkyloxy group, an aryloxy group, a heterocyclic oxy group, an oxycarbonyl group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, an oxycarbonyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an acylamino group, a sulfonyl group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfamoyl group, an alkylthio group, or an arylthio group; R_(b10) represents a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group, an acyl group, an oxycarbonyl group, a silyl group, or a phosphoryl group; X_(b) represents an alkylene group, a phenylene group, —O—, or —S—; and R_(b17) and R_(b18) each independently represent an aliphatic group or an aryl group.
 56. The silver halide color photographic photosensitive material according to claim 46, further containing at least one compound selected from the group consisting of compounds represented by any one of formulae (E-1), (E-2) and (E-3) in the layer containing said at least one yellow dye-forming coupler represented by formula (I):

wherein, in formulae (E-1), (E-2) and (E-3), R₄₁ represents an aliphatic group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an acyl group, an aliphatic oxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, an aliphatic sulfonyl group, an arylsulfonyl group, a phosphoryl group, or —Si(R₄₇)(R₄₈)(R₄₉), in which R₄₇, R₄₈ and R₄₉ each independently represent an aliphatic group, an aryl group, an aliphatic oxy group, or an aryloxy group; R₄₂, R₄₃, R₄₅ and R₄₆ each independently represent a hydrogen atom, or a substituent; and Ra₁, Ra₂, Ra₃ and Ra₄ each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an aliphatic group.
 57. The silver halide color photographic photosensitive material as claimed in claim 46, further containing at least one compound selected from the group consisting of a metal complex, a ultraviolet absorbing agent, a water-insoluble homopolymer or copolymer, and a compound represented by any one of formulae (TS-I), (TS-II), (TS-III), (TS-IV), (TS-V), (TS-VI) and (TS-VII):

wherein, in formula (TS-I), R₅₁ represents a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an acyl group, an aliphatic oxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, an aliphatic sulfonyl group, an aryl sulfonyl group, a phosphoryl group, or —Si(R₅₈)(R₅₉)(R₆₀), in which R₅₈, R₅₉ and R₆₀ each independently represent an aliphatic group, an aryl group, an aliphatic oxy group or an aryloxy group; X₅₁ represents —O— or —N(R₅₇)—, in which R₅₇ has the same meaning as R₅₁; X₅₅ represents —N═ or —C(R₅₂)═; X₅₆ represents —N═ or —C(R₅₄)═; X₅₇ represents —N═ or —C(R₅₆)═; R₅₂, R₅₃, R₅₄, R₅₅ and R₅₆ each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent; each combination of R₅₁ and R₅₂, R₅₇ and R₅₆, and R₅₁ and R₅₇ may bond together to form a 5- to 7-membered ring; each combination of R₅₂ and R₅₃, and R₅₃ and R₅₄ may bond together to form a 5- to 7-membered ring, a spiro ring, or a bicyclo ring; each of R₅₁, R₅₂, R₅₃, R₅₄, R₅₅, R₅₆ and R₅₇ cannot simultaneously represent a hydrogen atom; the total of carbon atoms of the compound represented by formula (TS-I) is 10 or more; and the compound represented by formula (TS-I) is neither identical to the compound represented by formula (Ph) nor the compound represented by any one of formulae (E-1), (E-2) and (E-3); wherein, in formula (TS-II), R₆₁, R₆₂, R₆₃ and R₆₄ each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an aliphatic group; each combination of R₆₁ and R₆₂, and R₆₃ and R₆₄ may bond together to form a 5- to 7-membered ring; X₆₁ represents a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group, an aliphatic oxy group, an aliphatic oxycarbonyl group, an aryl oxycarbonyl group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, an aliphatic oxycarbonyloxy group, an aryl oxycarbonyloxy group, an aliphatic sulfonyl group, an aryl sulfonyl group, an aliphatic sulfinyl group, an aryl sulfinyl group, a sulfamoyl group, a carbamoyl group, a hydroxy group, or an oxy radical group; X₆₂ represents a group of non-metal atoms necessary to form a 5- to 7-membered ring together with the —C(—R₆₁)(—R₆₂)—N(—X₆₁)—C(—R₆₃)(—R₆₄)—; and the total of carbon atoms of the compound represented by formula (TS-II) is 8 or more; wherein, in formula (TS-III), R₆₅ and R₆₆ each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group, an aryl group, an acyl group, an aliphatic oxycarbonyl group, an aryl oxycarbonyl group, a carbamoyl group, an aliphatic sulfonyl group, or an aryl sulfonyl group; R₆₇ represents a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group, an aliphatic oxy group, an aryloxy group, an aliphatic thio group, an arylthio group, an acyloxy group, an aliphatic oxycarbonyloxy group, an aryl oxycarbonyloxy group, a substituted amino group, a heterocyclic group, or a hydroxyl group; each combination of R₆₅ and R₆₆, R₆₆ and R₆₇, and R₆₅ and R₆₇ may bond together to form a 5- to 7-membered ring except 2,2,6,6-tetraalkylpiperidine skeleton; each of R₆₅ and R₆₆ cannot simultaneously represent a hydrogen atom; and the total of carbon atoms of R₆₅ and R₆₆ is 7 or more; wherein, in formula (TS-IV), R₇₁ represents a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, Li, Na, or K; R₇₂ represents an aliphatic group, an aryl group, or a heterocyclic group; R₇₁ and R₇₂ may bond together to form a 5- to 7-membered ring; q represents 0, 1 or 2; and the total of carbon atoms of R₇₁ and R₇₂ is 10 or more; wherein, in formula (TS-V), R₈₁, R₈₂ and R₈₃ each independently represent an aliphatic group, an aryl group, an aliphatic oxy group, an aryloxy group, an aliphatic amino group, or an aryl amino group; t represents 0 or 1; each combination of R₈₁ and R₈₂, and R₈₁ and R₈₃ may bond together to form a 5- to 8-membered ring; and the total of carbon atoms of R₈₁, R₈₂ and R₈₃ is 10 or more; wherein, in formula (TS-VI), R₈₅, R₈₆, R₈₇ and R₈₈ each independently represent a hydrogen atom, or a substituent except a carbonyl group, and any two of R₈₅, R₈₆, R₈₇ and R₈₈ may bond together to form a 5- to 7-membered ring except an aromatic ring only consisting of carbon atoms as a skeleton atom; the total of carbon atoms of the compound represented by formula (TS-VI) is 10 or more; and each of R₈₅, R₈₆, R₈₇ and R₈₈ cannot simultaneously represent a hydrogen atom; and wherein, in formula (TS-VII), R₉₁ represents a hydrophobic group having total carbon atoms of 10 or more; and Y₉₁ represents a monovalent organic group containing an alcoholic hydroxyl group.
 58. The silver halide color photographic photosensitive material according to claim 46, wherein a total amount of coated silver in entire photographic constitutional layers is 0.45 g/m² or less.
 59. A method of forming an imager comprising the step of subjecting the silver halide color photographic photosensitive material according to claim 46 to a processing wiht a color-developing time ranging from 10 seconds to 20 seconds.
 60. A method of forming an image, comprising the step of exposing the silver halide color photographic photosensitive material according to claim 46 to light by a scanning exposure system, wherein an exposure time per picture element is 1×10⁻⁸ to 1×10⁻⁴ seconds, and there is an overlapping between rasters adjacent to each other.
 61. The method of forming an image according to claim 60, further comprising subjecting the silver halide color photographic photosensitive material according to claim 46 to a processing with a color-developing time ranging from 10 seconds to 20 seconds. 